NEC NP-PA803U-41ZL 8,000-Lumen Professional Installation User Manual

Projector

PA803U/PA723U/PA653U/

PA853W/PA703W/PA903X

User’s Manual

Please visit our web site for User’s Manual in the latest version:

http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html

• ThePA723UandPA703WarenotdistributedinNorthAmerica.

ModelNo.

NP-PA803U/NP-PA723U/NP-PA653U/NP-PA853W/NP-PA703W/NP-PA903X

Ver.24/17

• Apple,Mac,MacOS,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista,Internet Explorer,.NET FrameworkandPowerPointareeither a registered

trademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• AccuBlend,NaViSet,andVirtualRemotearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.

inJapan,intheUnitedStateandothercountries.

• ThetermsHDMIandHDMIHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterface,andtheHDMILogoaretrademarksorregistered

trademarksofHDMILicensing,LLCintheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-

tion.

• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandother

countries and areas.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation.

• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandother

countries.

• ExtronandXTPareregisteredtrademarksofRGBSystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates.

• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.

• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarks

of their respective holders.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

NOTES

(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionable

points,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprotorothermattersdeemed

toresultfromusingtheProjector.

Important Information

Safety Cautions

Precautions

PleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTION

Toturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.

Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasily

accessible.

CAUTION

TOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.

THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.

REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectrical

shock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthis

unit has been provided.

Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.

DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGS

CANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)

ThisClassBdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,

Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.

CAUTION

Avoiddisplayingstationaryimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.

DoingsocanresultintheseimagesbeingtemporarilysustainedonthesurfaceoftheLCDpanel.

Ifthisshouldhappen,continuetouseyourprojector.Thestaticbackgroundfrompreviousimageswill

disappear.

Disposing of your used product

In the European Union

EU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-

uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludes

projectorsandtheirelectricalaccessories.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidance

ofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.

Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreduce

thewastesaswellasthenegativeimpacttothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.

ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.

Outside the European Union

IfyouwishtodisposeofusedelectricalandelectronicproductsoutsidetheEuropeanunion,pleasecontact

yourlocalauthorityandaskforthecorrectmethodofdisposal.

For EU:Thecrossed-outwheeledbinimpliesthatusedbatteriesshouldnotbeputtothegeneralhousehold

waste!Thereisaseparatecollectionsystemforusedbatteries,toallowpropertreatmentandrecyclingin

accordancewithlegislation.

According the EU directive 2006/66/EC, the battery can’t be disposed improperly. The battery shall be sepa-

rated to collect by local service.

Important Information

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCalifornia

tocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.

RF Interference (for USA only)

WARNING

The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modications or changes to the unit EXCEPT

thosespeciedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernment

regulationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomply

withthelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedto

providereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,

uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,

maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewill

not occur in a particular installation.

Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedby

turningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthe

followingmeasures:

• Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.

• Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.

• Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.

• Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.

ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(veAmps)fuseinstalledforusewith

thisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.

Important Safeguards

Thesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventreandshock.Pleasereadthem

carefullyandheedallwarnings.

Installation

• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:

- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.

- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.

- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.

- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.

- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.

• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.

- Inpowerfulmagneticelds

- Incorrosivegasenvironment

- Outdoors

• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:

- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.

- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk

of bodily injury.

- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance

withanylocalbuildingcodes.

- Please consult your dealer for more information.

iii

Important Information

WARNING

• Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingof

thecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldlead

totheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

 Thebelowpictogramindicatedonthecabinetmeanstheprecautionforavoidingtoplaceobjectsinfrontofthe

projector lens.

Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinvertical.

Forportraitinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakeventatthebottom.Observeprecautionsforportraitinstallation.

* Acustomizedstandisrequiredtobeattachedtotheprojector.(→page150)

130 mm or more

Fire and Shock Precautions

• Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyour

projector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pageviii)

• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventsontheleftrearandtherear(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheated

while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off. Parts of the projector may become

temporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnected

duringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

 Thebelowpictogrammeansthecautiontohotarea.

• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieve

anyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyour

projector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbya

qualiedservicepersonnel.

• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.

• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshock.

• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupply

tsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.

• Makesuretomountthepowercordstopperbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.Pleaserefertopage15 about

the power cord stopper.

Important Information

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.Thefollowinglabel,

thatisindicatedatthelens-mounting-sectionontheprojectorcabinet,describesthisprojectoriscategorizedinthe

riskgroup2ofIEC62471-5:2015.Aswithanybrightlightsource,donotstareintothebeam,RG2IEC62471-5:

2015.

• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyour

eyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthe

lensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancause

anunpredictableoutcomesuchasareorinjurytotheeyes.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent.

 Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheexhaust

vent.

• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorre.

- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.

 Ifthesuppliedpowercorddoesnotsatisfyrequirementsofyourregion'ssafetystandard,andvoltageandcurrent

foryourregion,makesuretousethepowercordthatconformstoandsatisesthem.

- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.

- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.

- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.

- Donotheatthepowercord.

- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.

• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualiedservicepersonnelunder

thefollowingconditions:

- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.

- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.

- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.

- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.

- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.

• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.

• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.

• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.

• WhenusingaLANcable:

 Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.

Important Information

CAUTION

• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-

ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotholdthecablecoverwhilemovingtheprojectorordonotapplyexcessiveforcetothecablecover.Doing

somaydamagethecablecover,resultingininjury.

• Besuretotightenthescrewsafterattachingthecablecover.Failuretodosomaycausethecablecovertocome

offandfall,resultingininjuryordamagetothecablecover.

• Donotputbundledcablesinthecablecover.Doingsomaydamagethepowercord,resultinginare.

• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select

[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[MODE]→[HIGH].)

• Donotmovetheprojectorbyholdingthecablecover.Doingsomayresultintheprojectorfallingorcausing

injury.

• Donotunplugthepowercablefromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.Doingsocan

causedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercable.

 ToturnofftheACpowersupplyunderthestatetheprojectorisON,useapowerstripequippedwithaswitch

andabreaker.

• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblink-

ingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.

• Thepowerplugmaybeunpluggedfromthesocketafterturningoffthepowersupplyoftheprojector.

 ImmediatelyafterturningofftheACpowersupplyduringvideoprojection,orafterturningoffthepowersupply

oftheprojector,theprojectorcabinetmaybecomeveryhotmomentarily.Pleasehandlewithcare.

Caution on Handling the Optional Lens

Whenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcap

tothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdam-

agecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.

Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.

Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.

Intheconditiontheprojectorisnolensmounted,donotputyourhandsinthelensmountopeningforcarryingthe

projector.

Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinngers

beingpinchedbythemovinglens.

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

• Replacetwobatteriesatthesametimewiththequitesameonesthathasbeeninstalledintheremotecontrolor

AAsizedalkalisbatterythatisconformedtoIEC60086-5.

Note for Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999

Thelamp(s)inthisproductcontainsmercury.Pleasedisposeaccordingtoyourlocalauthoritylaw.

FORMOREINFORMATION,CONTACT:

NECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.

500ParkBoulevard,Suite1100,Itasca,Illinois60143-1248

TELEPHONE800-836-0655

www.necdisplay.com

Important Information

Note for US Residents

Thelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.

Lamp Replacement

• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.

• Toreplacethelamp,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage156.

• Besuretoreplacethelampandlterwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE

LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP. USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE.]

appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmay

shatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycause

injury.

 Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.

A Lamp Characteristic

Theprojectorhasadischargelampforspecialpurposesasalightsource.

Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelampon

andoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.

CAUTION:

• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroff

andthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.

• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glass

fragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.

About High Altitude mode

• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700meters

orhigher.

 Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]

cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesand

turn on the projector.

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]

cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcom-

ponents such as the lamp.

About Copyright of original projected pictures:

Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenue

suchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-

tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.

[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market

EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

vii

Important Information

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3D

eyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideolesandthelike.

Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:

• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.

• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtooclosea

distance can strain your eyes.

• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhour

ofviewing.

• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3D

images.

• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurry

vision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.

• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.

AUTO POWER OFF Function

Thefactorydefaultsettingfor[AUTOPOWEROFF]is15minutes.Ifnoinputsignalisreceivedandnooperationis

performedontheprojectorduring15minutes,theprojectorisautomaticallypoweredoffforsavingthepowercon-

sumption.Inordertocontroltheprojectorbyanexternaldevice,setthe[AUTOPOWEROFF]to[OFF].Pleaserefer

page133 for details.

viii

Important Information

Clearance for Installing the Projector

Allowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.

Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.

AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.

HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector'sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidethe

projectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.

Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.

20 cm/7.9" or greater 13 cm/5.1" or greater

Filter cover

(Intake vent)

Lamp cover

NOTE:

The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the left and right of the projector assuming sufﬁcient clearance has been kept

for the front, back and top of the projector.

Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.

10 cm/3.9" or greater

Exhaust vent

NOTE:

The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back of the projector assuming sufﬁcient clearance has been kept for the

right, left and top of the projector.

Example 3 – In the case of portrait projection.

Filter cover

(Intake vent)

13 cm/5.1" or greater

NOTE:

• Thedrawingshowstheproperclearancerequiredforundertheprojectorassumingsufcientclearancehasbeenkeptforthe

front, rear and top of the projector.

• Seepage150 for an installation example on portrait projection.

Table of Contents

Important Information ............................................................................................i

1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1

❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1

❷IntroductiontotheProjector ............................................................................................ 2

CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ...................................................2

Installation ................................................................................................................. 2

Videos .......................................................................................................................2

Network .....................................................................................................................3

Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................3

Maintenance .............................................................................................................4

Aboutthisuser’smanual ........................................................................................... 5

❸PartNamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................6

Front/Top ...................................................................................................................6

Rear ..........................................................................................................................8

Controls/IndicatorPanel ............................................................................................9

Terminals ................................................................................................................ 10

❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ............................................................................... 11

BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................12

RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................12

OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl .......................................................13

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................14

❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................14

❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................15

Usingthepowercordstopper .................................................................................15

❸TurningontheProjector ................................................................................................17

PerformingLensCalibration ...................................................................................17

NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) ....................................... 18

❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................19

Selectingthecomputerorvideosource ..................................................................19

❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................21

Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................22

Focus ......................................................................................................................23

Applicablelens:NP30ZL ......................................................................................... 24

Applicablelens:NP11FL .........................................................................................25

Applicablelens:NP40ZL/NP41ZL ...........................................................................26

Applicablelens:NP43ZL ......................................................................................... 27

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 28

AdjustingtheTiltFoot ..............................................................................................29

❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ...................................................................30

AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................30

❼TurningUporDownVolume .........................................................................................30

❽TurningofftheProjector ................................................................................................31

❾AfterUse .......................................................................................................................32

Table of Contents

3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................33

❶TurningofftheImageandSound .................................................................................. 33

❷ShifttheOn-ScreenMenudisplayingposition ..............................................................34

❸FreezingaPicture ......................................................................................................... 35

❹EnlargingaPicture .......................................................................................................35

❺ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingEcoMode[ECOMODE] .36

CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ...............................................37

❻CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ..................38

❼OperationfortheOn-ScreenMenubyacommerciallyavailableUSBmouse ..............40

Menu operation .......................................................................................................40

Menu position control ..............................................................................................41

Geometriccorrection ...............................................................................................41

❽

PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ........................................43

❾Projecting3Dvideos .....................................................................................................46

Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................46

Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................48

❿ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ...................................................49

⓫StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY]..........................56

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: .......................................56

Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ................................59

4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................62

❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................62

Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTURE

BYPICTURE]..........................................................................................................62

Case2.Usingfourprojectors(liquidcrystalpanel:WUXGA)toprojectvideos

witharesolutionof3840×2160pixels[TILING] ....................................................63

Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................65

❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ...................................................................66

Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................67

Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................68

Restrictions .............................................................................................................69

❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................70

Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................71

[BLENDCURVE].....................................................................................................73

BlackLevelAdjustment ........................................................................................... 74

5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................................. 76

❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................76

❷

MenuElements .............................................................................................................77

❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................78

❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................84

❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................88

[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................88

[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................92

[VIDEO] ................................................................................................................... 96

[3DSETTINGS] ......................................................................................................98

UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] .............................................. 99

Table of Contents

❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY] ................................................................ 101

[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] ............................................................................... 101

[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] ............................................................................. 103

[EDGEBLENDING] ..............................................................................................108

[MULTISCREEN]..................................................................................................109

❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ....................................................................111

[MENU(1)] ..............................................................................................................111

[MENU(2)] ............................................................................................................. 113

[INSTALLATION] ................................................................................................... 114

[CONTROL] .......................................................................................................... 118

[NETWORKSETTINGS] .......................................................................................125

[SOURCEOPTIONS] ...........................................................................................130

[POWEROPTIONS] .............................................................................................132

ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................134

❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................136

[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................136

[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................137

[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................137

[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................137

[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................138

[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................ 138

[VERSION] ............................................................................................................ 138

[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................139

[CONDITIONS] .....................................................................................................139

[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................140

6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................141

❶Mountingalens(soldseparately) ...............................................................................141

Mountingthelens..................................................................................................141

Removingthelens ................................................................................................142

❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................143

AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................143

DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................144

ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................146

ConnectingHDMIInput .........................................................................................147

ConnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) ....................148

Connectingseveralprojectors .............................................................................. 149

Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .................................................................150

ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ................................................................................... 152

7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................153

❶CleaningtheFilters .....................................................................................................153

❷CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................155

❸CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................155

❹ReplacingtheLamp ....................................................................................................156

❺Replacingthelters ....................................................................................................160

xii

Table of Contents

8. Appendix ..............................................................................................................162

❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................162

Lenstypesandthrowdistance .............................................................................162

Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions .................................................................166

Lensshiftingrange ................................................................................................167

❷CompatibleInputSignalList ....................................................................................... 169

❸Specications .............................................................................................................172

❹CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................175

❺Mountingthecablecover(soldseparately) ................................................................176

❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainconnectors .............................................177

❼ChangingtheBackgroundLogo(VirtualRemoteTool) ...............................................179

❽Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................180

Featureofeachindicator ......................................................................................180

IndicatorMessage(Statusmessage) ...................................................................180

IndicatorMessage(Errormessage) ......................................................................182

ExplanationonthePOWERindicatorandstandbystate ......................................183

CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................185

Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................187

❾PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................188

❿TroubleshootingCheckList .........................................................................................191

⓫REGISTERYOURPROJECTOR!(forresidentsintheUnitedStates,Canada,and

Mexico) .................................................................................................................193

1. Introduction

❶ What’s in the Box?

Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.

Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Projector

Dust cap for lens (24F53241)

* The projector is shipped without

a lens. For the types of lens and

throw distances, see page 162.

Remote control

(7N901081)

AA alkaline batteries

(x2)

Input selection char-

acter sticker

Power cord

(US: 7N080241)

(EU: 7N080022)

Power cord stopper

(24F53221/24F53231)

For the preventive mea-

sure from dropping off

the power cord.

Lens theft prevention screw

(24V00941)

This screw makes it difficult to

remove the lens mounted on

the projector. (→ page 142)

Straps (for preventing the lamp

cover and the lter cover from fall-

ing down) (24F54161, 24F54151)

Attaching the straps to the lamp

cover and the lter cover prevents

them from falling when the projec-

tor is suspended from the ceiling.

For North America only

Limited warranty

For customers in Europe:

You will nd our current valid Guar-

antee Policy on our Web Site:

www.nec-display-solutions.com

• ImportantInfomation(ForNorth

America: 7N8N7661)

• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorth

America: 7N8N7672) (For Other

countries than North America:

7N8N7672 and 7N8N7681)

NEC Projector CD-ROM

User’s manual (PDF)

(7N952552)

1. Introduction

❷ Introduction to the Projector

Thissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector

Thisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimages

upto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,Blu-ray

player,ordocumentcamera.

Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,

andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*

.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.

 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.

 Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk

of bodily injury.

 Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance

withanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Installation

• Liquidcrystaltypehighbrightness/highresolutionprojector

Model Brightness Resolution AspectRatio

PA803U 8000lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10

PA723U

7200lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10

PA653U

6500lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10

PA853W

8500lm WXGA(1280×800) 16:10

PA703W

7000lm WXGA(1280×800) 16:10

PA903X

9000lm XGA(1024×768) 4:3

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

 Thisprojectorsupportseighttypesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplaces

of installation and projection methods.

 Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.

 Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.

• Motorizedlenscontrolfunctionforeasilyadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimage

 Thepositionoftheprojectedimage(lensshift)canbeadjustedbybuttonseitheronthecontrolpanelontheside

face of the cabinet or the remote control.

• 360°installationangle(tilt-free)

 Theprojectorcanbeinstalledatanyangle(360°)however,theprojectorcannotbeinstalledtiltedtotheleftor

right.

• Portraitprojectionispossible

 Thisprojectorcanperformportraitprojectionwiththeprojectionscreenturned90°.

Videos

• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,etc.)

 Theprojectorisequippedwithavarietyofinput/outputterminals:HDMI(input×2),DisplayPort,HDBaseT(input

x1,outputx1),computer(analog),etc.

 Theprojector’sHDMIinput,DisplayPortinputterminalsandHDBaseTPortssupportHDCP.

• HDMIandHDBaseTsupportHDCP2.2/1.4

• DisplayPortsupportsHDCP1.4

1. Introduction

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

 Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

 Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthe

mainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors

 ThisprojetorequipstheHDBaseTIN/EthernetandHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetports.Multipleprojectorsinsame

brightnessandresolutionuptofourunitscanbeconnetedinadaisychainbyaLAN*

cable via these terminals

withoutavideocable.Ahighqualitypictureisachievedbydividingandprojectinghighresolutionvideosamong

the various projectors.

 Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.

 UseacommerciallyavailableCAT5eSTPcableoroneinahigherspecication.

• Seamlessswitchfunctionforsmootherscreenchangeswhenswitchingthesignal

 Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldsothatthatthenewimagecan

beswitchedtowithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

• SupportsHDMI3Dformat

 Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewearand

3DemittersthatsupportXpand3D.

Network

• SupportswiredLAN

 EquipstheLANandHDBaseT/Ethernet(RJ-45)ports.UtilizingawiredLANconnectedwiththeseports,itenables

to control the projector by a computer.

• CRESTRONROOMVIEWandExtronXTPcompatibility

 Theprojectorsupports CRESTRON ROOMVIEWand ExtronXTP,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedin the

networktobemanagedandcontrolledfromacomputerMoreover,itenablestooutputandcontrolimageviaan

ExtronXTPtransmitterconnectedwiththeprojector..

• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard

 Thisprojectorsupportsourutilitysoftware(NaViSetAdministrator2,VirtualRemoteTool,etc.).

 NaViSetAdministrator2helpsyoucontroltheprojectorbyacomputerviawiredLANconnection.

 VirtualRemoteToolhelpsyouperformoperationsbyavirtualremotecontrolsuchasprojector'spoweronoroff

andsignalselectionviawiredLANconnection.Moreover,ithasfunctiontosendanimagetotheprojectorand

 Pleasevisitourwebsitefordownloadingeachsoftware.

 URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

Energy-saving

• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)

 Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“NORMAL”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeac-

tivatingthePowerManagementis0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)and0.11W(100-130VAC)/

0.16W(200-240VAC)whenLANisineffective.

• “Ecomode”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

 The projector is equipped with an “eco mode” for reducingpower consumption during use. Furthermore, the

power-savingeffectwhentheecomodeissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO

emissions and

thisisindicatedontheconrmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”onthe

on-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

1. Introduction

Maintenance

• Maximumreplacementtimeforthelampis5000hoursandforthelteris10000hours.

 Whenusedintheecomode,thelampreplacementtime*isextendedtoamaximumof5000hours.

 *Thistimeisnotguaranteed.

 Atthesametime,themaximumusagetimeforthelteris10000hours.**

 **Itisvarydependingontheprojectorinstallationcircumstances.

* Actualmenusmaybedifferentfromthemenuimagesinthisuser’smanual.

1. Introduction

About this user’s manual

Thefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthersttime.Takeafewminutesnowto

reviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llnd

anoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

Notation by Resolution

Theseindicatethedescriptionsofthemodelgroupsaccordingtotheresolutionoftheliquidcrystalpanels.

WUXGAType

ApplicabletomodelsPA803U/PA723U/PA653U.

WXGAType

ApplicabletomodelsPA853W/PA703W.

XGAType

ApplicabletomodelsPA903X.

*Thedescriptionappliestoallmodelsifthetypenameisnotindicated.

How to Differentiate the Model Group

P A 8 0 3 U

“U”referstoaWUXGAtype.

“W”referstoaWXGAtype.

“X”referstoaXGAtype.

ModelNameSymbol

Example:PA803U

“NP-”isnotindicatedontopofthecabinet.

1. Introduction

❸ Part Names of the Projector

Front/Top

Thelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP13ZLlensismounted.

Controls

(→ page 9)

Lens

Remote Sensor (located on the

front and the rear)

(→ page 13)

Remote Sensor

(→ page 13)

Zoom Lever/Zoom Ring (→ page

28)

Lens Cap

(The optional lens is shipped with

the lens cap.)

Focus Ring

(→ page 23)

Adjustable Tilt Foot

(→ page 29)

Indicator Section

(→ page 9)

Lens Release Button

(→ page 142)

Adjustable Tilt Foot

(→ page 29)

Exhaust vent

Heated air is exhausted from here.

Mounting the strap

Beforestartingtouse,mountthestrapstothelampcoverandtheltercoverforpreventingthemfromdroppingdown.

Lamp cover

Preparation:Removethelampcoverfromtheprojector.

Refertotheclause“Replacingthelamp”onpage156 about the lamp cover installation.

1. Insert the L-shaped part of the lamp cover strap (flat resinoid strap) to the protruded section on the rear

face of the lamp cover as the below illustration.

Hole for xing the strap

2. Insert the opposite side of the lamp cover strap to the hole on the projector body.

Lamp Cover (→ page 156)

Security Bar

Attach an anti-theft device.

The security bar accepts security

wires or chains up to 0.18 inch/4.6

mm in diameter.

1. Introduction

Filter cover

Preparation:Removetheltercoverfromtheprojector.

Refertotheclause“Replacingthelter”onpage160abouttheltercoverinstallation.

1. Insert the round protrusion at the filter cover strap end (resinoid strap) to the hole on the filter cover.

2. Insert the square protrusion at the opposite end of the filter cover strap to the hole on the projector body

and rotate the strap 90°for fixation. It becomes easier to fix the strap if you remove the filter once.

Hole for xing the strap

Rotate the strap 90°

How to paste the input selection character sticker of the remote control

• PeeloffthecoverofthestickerandalignthestickerholeswithButtons1to6beforepasting.

• Pleasetakecarenottoletthestickercontactthebuttonswhenpasting.

• Theexplanationsandillustrationsinthismanualareprovidedwiththestickerpasted.

1. Introduction

Terminals

(→ page 10)

Rear

Remote Sensor (located on the

front and the rear)

(→ page 13)

AC IN Terminal

Connect the supplied power cord’s

three-pin plug here, and plug the

other end into an active wall outlet.

(→ page 15)

* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver

SecuritySystem.

Built-in Security Slot ( )*

Cable cover connection

(right and left)

Screw holes and grooves for the

optional cable cover

(→ page 176)

Intake vent / Filter

(→ page 153, 160)

Exhaust vent

Heated air is exhausted from here.

1. Introduction

Controls/Indicator Panel

2 3 4 5

11 12 13

1. (POWER)Button

(→page17,31)

2. POWER Indicator

(→page16,17,31,180,183)

3. STATUS Indicator

(→page180)

4. LAMPIndicator

(→page156,180)

5. TEMP.Indicator

(→page36,180)

6. INPUT Button

(→page19)

7. MENU Button

(→page76)

8. ▲▼◀▶/VolumeButtons◀▶

(→page30,76)

9. ENTER Button

(→page76)

10.EXITButton

(→page76)

11. FOCUS Button

(→page26)

12. ZOOM/L-CALIB. Button

(→page28)

13. SHIFT/HOME POSITION Button

(→page22)

1. Introduction

Terminals

2 73 1

811

13 10

1. HDMI1INTerminal(TypeA)

(→page144,145,147)

2. HDMI2INTerminal(TypeA)

(→page144,145,147)

3. DisplayPort IN Terminal

(→page144)

4. COMPUTERIN/ComponentInputTerminal(Mini

D-Sub15Pin)

(→page143,146)

5. COMPUTERAUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)

(→page143,145)

6. HDBaseTIN/EthernetPort(RJ-45)

(→page148,149)

7. HDBaseT OUT/EthernetPort(RJ-45)

(→page63,149)

8. AUDIOOUTMiniJack(StereoMini)

(→page143,145,147)

9. USB-APort(TypeA)

(→page122)

10. LANPort(RJ-45)

(→page152)

11. 3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN3Pin)

(→page46)

12.PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin)

(→page178)

 Use this port to connect a PC or control system.

Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserial

communicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourown

program,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage188.

13.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini)

Use this terminal for wired remote control of the pro-

jectorusingtheNECremotecontrol,RD-465E.

 Connectthe projector and our remote control,RD-

465E,usinga commercially availablewiredremote

control cable.

NOTE:

• WhenaremotecontrolcableisconnectedtotheREMOTE

terminal, infrared remote control operations cannot be per-

formed.

• When [HDBaseT]is selected in the[REMOTE SENSOR]

and the projector is connected to a commercially-available

transmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontrol

operations in infra-red cannot be carried out if transmission

of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission

device.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbe

carried out when the power supply of the transmission device

is switched off.

1. Introduction

❹ Part Names of the Remote Control

9. Edge Blend. Button

(→page71)

10. Multi. Button

(→page109)

11. Geometric. Button

(→page38,103)

12. INPUT Button

(→page19)

13. PIP Button

(→page67)

14.PBP/POPButton

(→page67)

15.AUTOADJ.Button

(→page30)

16.1(HDMI1)Button

(→page19)

17. 2(HDMI2)Button

(→page19)

18.3(DisplayPort)Button

(→page19)

19.4(Computer)Button

(→page19)

20.5(HDBaseT)Button

(→page19)

21. 6 Button

(not available on this series of

projectors)

22. 7 Button

(not available on this series of

projectors)

23. 8 Button

(not available on this series of

projectors)

24.9Button

(not available on this series of

projectors)

25.IDSETButton

(→page123)

26. Numeric Keypad Button/

CLEAR Button

(→page123)

27. MENU Button

(→page76)

1. Infrared Transmitter

(→page13)

2. POWER ON Button

(→page17)

3. STANDBY Button

(→page31)

4. FREEZEButton

(→page35)

5. BLANKButton

(→page33)

6. MUTE Button

(→page33)

7. AV-MUTEButton

(→page33)

8. TEST Button

(→page84)

28.EXITButton

(→page76)

29. ▲▼◀▶ Button

(→page76)

30. ENTER Button

(→page76)

31. L-CLICK Button*

32. R-CLICK Button*

33.VOL./FOCUS(+)(−)Button

(→page26)

 (Works only when NP40ZL,

NP41ZL,orNP43ZLismounted)

34.D-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)(−)Button

(→page35)

 (Works only when NP40ZL,

NP41ZL,orNP43ZLismounted)

35.SHUTTERButton

(not available on this series of

projectors)

36. LENS SHIFT Button

(→page22)

37. PICTURE Button

(→page88)

38. DISPLAY Button

(→page101)

39. ASPECT Button

(→page94)

40.COLORButton

(→page90)

41.3DSet.Button

(→page46)

42.SETUPButton

(→page111)

43.CTLButton

(→page26,28,34)

44.ECOButton

(→page36)

45.INFOButton

(→page137)

46.HELPButton

(→page136)

* The▲▼◀▶,L-CLICKandR-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnectedwithyourcomputer.

1. Introduction

Battery Installation

1. Press the catch and remove

the battery cover.

2. Install new ones (AA). En-

sure that you have the bat-

teries’polarity(+/−)aligned

correctly.

3. Slipthecoverbackoverthebatteriesuntil

it snaps into place.

NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornew

and old batteries.

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

• Replacetwobatteriesatthesametimewiththequitesameonesthathasbeeninstalledintheremotecontrolor

AAsizedalkalisbatterythatisconformedtoIEC60086-5.

1. Introduction

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

40 m/1575 inch

Remote control

Remote sensor on projector cabinet

40 m/1575 inch

20 m/787 inch

15 m/591 inch

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleofthe

remote sensor on the projector cabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfalls

onthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

❶ Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1

• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→page15)

Step 2

• Turningontheprojector(→page17)

Step 3

• Selectingasource(→page19)

Step 4

• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→page21)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→page38, 103)

Step 5

• Adjustingapictureandsound

- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 30)

- Turning up or down volume (→ page 30)

Step6

• Makingapresentation

Step 7

• Turningofftheprojector(→page31)

Step 8

• Afteruse(→page32)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “(2)

Making Connections” on page 143.

Connect the display output terminal (mini D-sub 15 pin) on the computer to the computer video input terminal

on the projector with a commercially-available computer cable (with ferrite core) and then turn the knobs of the

connectors to secure them.

2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

First connect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug to the AC IN terminal of the projector, and then connect

another plug of the supplied power cord directly in the wall outlet. Do not use any plug converter.

Using the power cord stopper

TopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,usethepowercordstopper.

CAUTION

• Topreventthepowercordfromcomingloose,makesurethatalltheprongsofthepowercordplugarefullyin-

sertedintotheACINterminaloftheprojectorbeforeusingthepowercordstopper.Aloosecontactofthepower

cordmaycauseareorelectricshock.

Thepowercordstopperisconsistedfromthepart(A)thatshouldbeinstalledontheprojectorandthepart(B)that

should be installed on the power cord.

1. Fixthepart(A)totheACINterminalontheprojector

cabinet.

Part (A)

2. Fixthepart(B)tothepowercord.

Part (B)

3. InsertthepowercordplugtotheACINterminaluntil

the power cord stopper is fastened completely and

clicksoundisheard.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Upon connecting the power cable, the POWER indicator of the projector will light in green. If there are no input

signals, the device will go into the standby state.

(In the state, standby mode is NORMAL.) (→ page 183)

COMPUTER IN

Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into

both the AC IN and the wall outlet.

To wall outlet

Computer cable (with ferrite core)

(sold commercially)

CAUTION:

PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe

ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.

Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❸ Turning on the Projector

1. Removethelenscap.

2. Press the (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinet

orthePOWERONbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The POWER indicator lit in green will start to blink in blue.

After that, the image will be projected onto the screen.

TIP:

• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOUR

PASSWORD.” is displayed, it means thatthe [SECURITY]

feature is turned on. (→ page 43)

• Whenthe ECO message isdisplayed, it meansthat [ON] is

selectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→ page 112)

After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer

or video source is turned on.

NOTE: A blue screen (blue background) is displayed when no signal

is being input (by factory default menu settings).

Sleep state Blinking Power On

Blinking in green

Blinking blue

light

Steady blue

light

(→page180)

Performing Lens Calibration

Aftermountingtheseparatelyavailablelensunitorreplacing

alensunit,perform[LENSCALIBRATION]byholdingtopress

ZOOM/L-CALIB.buttononthecabinetovertwoseconds.

Calibration corrects the adjustable zoom, shift, and focus

range.Ifcalibrationisnotperformed,youmaynotbeableto

getthebestfocusandzoomevenifyouadjustthefocusand

zoomforthelens.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)

Whenyourstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectone

ofthe29menulanguages.

To select a menu language, follow these steps:

1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶ button to select one of the 30

languagesfromthemenu.

2. PresstheENTERbuttontoexecutetheselection.

After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu

operation.

Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.

(→[LANGUAGE]onpage80 and 111)

NOTE:

• Ifthemessage,[PLEASESET"DATEANDTIME".]isshown,pleasesetthecurrentdateandtime.(→ page 122)

• Inthecasethismessageisnotshown,the[DATEANDTIMESETTING]isrecommendedtocomplete.

• Duringprojection,aftershuttingdownthepowersupply(directpoweroff),waitforabout1minuteorlongerbeforeturningon

the power again.

• Keepthelenscapoffthelenswhiletheprojector’spowerison.

If the lens cap is on, it could be warped due to high temperature.

• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.

- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the

projectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocool

down.

- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.

Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 122)

- Ifthelampfailstolight,andifthePOWERindicatorblinksinredandtheLAMPindicatorlightsinred,waitafullminuteand

then turn on the power.

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.

• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis

stabilized.

• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.

• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-

ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❹ Selecting a Source

Selecting the computer or video source

NOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.

Detecting the Signal Automatically

PresstheINPUTbuttonfor1secondorlonger.Theprojectorwillsearch

fortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchange

as follows:

HDMI1→HDMI2→DisplayPort→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→HDMI1

→ …

• Pressitbrieytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.

Press the ▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpress

theENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayin

the[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.

TIP: If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.

Using the Remote Control

Pressanyoneofthe1/HDMI1,2/HDMI2,3/DisplayPort,4/Computer,

or5/HDBaseTbutton.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Selecting Default Source

Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbutton.

4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [DEFAULT INPUT SELECT] screen will be displayed.

(→ page 130)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.

6. PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimestoclosethemenu.

7. Restarttheprojector.

The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,

select[HDBaseT].

TIP:

• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwill

powerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.

 ([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 132)

• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position

Usethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.

In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontal

position

[Lensshift]

(→page22)

Adjustingthefocus

[Focusring]

(→page23)

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage

(→page28)

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sinclination

[Tiltfoot]*¹

(→page29)

NOTE*

:Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfeetwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelens

shift adjustment range.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

CAUTION

• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyour

eyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultin

ngersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.

1. PresseitherSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttononthecabinetorLENS

SHIFTBUTTONontheremotecontrol.

The [LENS SHIFT] screen will be displayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

• Tosetbackthelenstothehomeposition

Press and hold the SHIFT/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds. The lens mounted on the projector goes

back to the home position. (roughly to the center position)

NOTE:

• Ifthelensisshiftedtothemaximuminthediagonaldirection,thescreenperipheralareawillbedarkorshaded.

• UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

TIP:

• Thediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrange(projectionformat:desk/front)oftheWUXGAtype(excludingthelens

unitNP30ZL).

• RefertoPage167forthelensshiftadjustmentrangeoftheWXGAtype/XGAtypeandforceilinghanging/frontprojection.

100%V

50%V

10%V

100%H

30%H 30%H

10%H 10%H

Height of projected image

Width of projected image

NP803U/PA723U/PA653U

 Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).

Focus

RecommendtoperformthefocusadjustmentafterleavingtheprojectorunderthestatetheTESTPATTERNhas

beenprojectedforover30minutes.

Pleaserefertopage87intheUser’sManualabouttheTESTPATTERN.

Applicablelens:NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL

Usethefocusringtoobtainthebestfocus.

Focus ring

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicable lens: NP30ZL

TheNP30ZLlensunitalignstheperipheralfocusaroundtheopticalaxis.

Peripheral focus ring

Focus Ring

Zoom Lever

1. Turn the focus ring left and right to align the focus

around the optical axis.

* The diagram shows an example when the lens shift is

moved upward. The bottom of the screen is adjusted.

When the lens is in the center, the center of the screen

is adjusted.

Focus Ring

Optical axis

2. Turntheperipheralfocusringtotheleftandrightto

alignthefocusofthescreenperipheralarea.

At this point, the focus around the optical axis adjusted in

(1) remains unchanged.

Peripheral focus

ring

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicable lens: NP11FL

WiththeNP11FLlens,adjustthefocusandpicturedistortion.

Preparations:

PressandholdtheSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttononthecabinetlongerthan2secondsforshiftingbackthelens

to the home position.

1.Turnthedistortionringtotheleftedge.

Distortion ring

2. Turnthefocusleverclockwiseandcounterclockwise

to adjust the focus at the center of the screen.

Focus lever

3. Usethedistortionringtocorrectthescreen’sdistortion.

(This also brings the screen peripheral area into focus.)

4. Use the focus lever to adjust the screen’s overall focus.

* If the focus at the center of the screen is off, turn the

distortion ring a little counterclockwise. The focus at the

center of the screen can now be adjusted with the focus

lever.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicable lens: NP40ZL/NP41ZL

1.PresstheFOCUSbuttononthecabinet.

The LENS FOCUS control screen will be displayed on.

* Press ◀▶ buttons to adjust focus. In another way, press

and hold the CTL button and then press VOLUME/

FOCUS +/- button on the remote control

2. WhenthecursorisontheCENTERonon-screenmenu,

press either ◀ or ▶buttontoalignfocusaroundthe

optical axis.

* The picture shows and example when the lens shift

is moved upward. The focus for the lower part of the

screen is aligned.

When the lens is at the center, the focus for the center

of the screen is aligned.

Optical axis

3. Press ▼ button to select the PERIPHERY on the on-

screen menu, and then press either ◀ or ▶ button to

alignthefocusofscreenperipheralarea.Duringthis

operation, the focus for around the optical axis will be

maintained.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicable lens: NP43ZL

1. PresstheFOCUSbuttononthecabinet.

Press ◀▶ buttons to adjust focus. In another way, press and hold the CTL button and then press VOLUME/

FOCUS +/- button on the remote control.

* PERIPHERY LENS FOCUS is not available for this lens unit.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Zoom

Applicablelens:NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL/NP30ZL

Turnthezoomringclockwiseandcounterclockwise.

Zoom ring

Applicablelensunits:NP40ZL/NP41ZL/NP43ZL

1. PressZOOM/L-CALIB.button.

The ZOOM adjustment screen will be displayed on.

• ◀ or ▶ buttons on the cabinet or the remote control are available to adjust ZOOM while the ZOOM adjustment

screen is displayed on.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.

The zoom is adjusted.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the Tilt Foot

1.Turntheleftandrighttiltfoottoadjust.

The tilt foot lengthen and shorten when turned.

Turn one of the tilt foot to adjust the image so that it is level.

• Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“3-6CorrectingHorizontal

and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]” (→ page 38)

and “[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]” (→ page 103).

• Thetiltfootcanbelengthenedbyamaximumof20mm.

• Thetiltfootcanbeusedtotilttheprojectorbyamaximumof4°.

NOTE:

• Donotlengthenthetiltfootanymorethan20mm/0.8".Doingsowillmakethe

tiltfoot’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfoottocomeoffthe

projector.

• Donotusethetiltfootforanypurposeotherthanadjustinginclinationofthe

projector installation angle.

 Handlingthetiltfootimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthe

tilt foot or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt foot, could damage the projector.

Tilt foot

Down

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❻ Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically

Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust

Whenprojectingasignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminal,HDMI1inputterminal,HDMI2inputterminal,Dis-

playPortinputterminal,HDBaseTIN/Ethernetport,adjustthepicturequalitywithasingletouchofthebuttonifthe

edgesofthescreenarecutofforiftheprojectionqualityisbad.

PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.

Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthersttime.

[Poor picture] [Normal picture]

NOTE:

Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.

• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]

manually. (→ page 92, 93)

❼ Turning Up or Down Volume

SoundlevelfromtheAUDIOOUTterminalcanbeadjusted.

Important:

• DonotturnupthevolumetothemaximumlevelontheexternalspeakersystemconnectedtotheAUDIOOUToftheprojector.

Doingsomayproduceanunexpected,loudsoundatthetimeofturningonorofftheprojector,causingdamagetoyourhearing.

Whenadjustingthevolumeontheexternalspeakersystem,setvolumelevelofthespeakersystemtolessthanhalfitsratingand

adjust the volume on the projector to get appropriate sound level.

TIP:Whennomenusappear,the◀ and ▶ buttons on the projector cabinet work

as a volume control.

NOTE:

• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththe◀ or ▶ button when an image is enlarged

byusingtheD-ZOOM(+)buttonorwhenthemenuisdisplayed.

Increase volume

Decrease volume

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❽ Turning off the Projector

To turn off the projector:

1. First, press the  (POWER) button onthe projector

cabinetortheSTANDBYbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE ? / CARBON SAV-

INGS- SESSION 0.000[g-CO2]] message will appear.

2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the

(POWER)ortheSTANDBYbuttonagain.

The lamp will go off and the power supply will be cut. If

no operation is performed on the projector and no signal

is input to the projector, the projector will be in standby

state. The POWER indicator will light in orange (In the state,

the standby mode is NORMAL and the PROFILE for the

WIRED LAN is available.).

Power On

Steadily lights in

blue

Sleep

Blinks in orange

CAUTION:

PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe

ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.

Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

NOTE:

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.

• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.

• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocould

deterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowerwhileanimageisbeingprojected,

usethepowerstrip’sswitch,thebreaker,etc.

• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosing

themenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❾ After Use

Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.

1. Unplugthepowercord.

Forpullingoutthepowerplug,pressandholdtheprotrudedsection

ontheleftandrightsidesofthepart(B).

2. Disconnectanyothercables.

3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.

4. Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.

❶ Turning off the Image and Sound

Theprojectedvideoandtheoutputsoundfromthesoundoutputterminal

will disappear momentarily.

Press the BLANK button.

Theprojectedvideowillbecutoff.

Press the MUTE button.

Theaudiowillbecutoff.

PresstheAV-MUTEbutton.

Theprojectedvideoandaudiowillbecutoff.

• Pressthebuttonsonemoretimeforthecancelledvideoandaudioto

appearagain.

 WhenAV-MUTEandBLANKarecontinuedforsometime,theenergy-

savingfunctionwillactivatetolowerthelamppower.

NOTE:

• Whenthe AV-MUTE and BLANK buttons are pressed immediately afterthe

energy-saving function is activated, sometimes the brightness may not return

to normal immediately.

TIP:

• Thevideowilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.

3. Convenient Features

❷ Shift the On-Screen Menu displaying position

1. Press the MENU button.

The On-Screen Menu will be displayed on.

2. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[SETUP]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

The cursor will move to the [MENU1].

3. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[MENU2].

4. Move the cursor by the ▼buttontothe[MENUPOSITION]andthenpresstheENTER.

The On-Screen Menu will go into the MENU POSITION setup screen.

5. MovethecursoreitherTO[HORIZONTALPOSITION]or[VERTICALPOSITION]bypressing▼ or ▲ button

and then press ◀/▶

buttontoshifttheOn-ScreenMenu.

For finishing the setting on the On-Screen Menu, press the MENU button on the remote control.

TIP:

• Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,theOn-ScreenMenudisplayingpositionwillberesettothedefaultfactorysettingposition.

• Thisfunctiondoesnotinuencetothedisplaypositionofinputterminalinformationandmessage.

• ItenablestomovethemenubymouseclickwhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnected.

• Itenablestomovethemenupositionbythe▼▲◀ and ▶buttonsholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrolor

mouse click.

• WhiletheMENUPOSITIONoftheon-screenmenuisdisplayedonandthemenuismovedbythe▼▲◀ and ▶ buttons holding

topresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol,theindicationofadjustedvalueonthemenuwillnotbechanged.Inthiscase,

closetheMENUPOSITIONmenuonceanddisplayitagainforindicatingtheadjustedvalueproperly.

3. Convenient Features

❸ Freezing a Picture

PresstheFREEZEbutton to freezeapicture.Pressagain to resume

motion.

NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back.

❹ Enlarging a Picture

Youcanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE:

• Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnicationmaybelessthan

four times, or the function may be restricted.

Todoso:

1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button.

The area of the magnified image will be moved

3. PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.

 EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisreduced.

NOTE:

• Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.

• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnication.

3. Convenient Features

❺ Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using

Eco Mode [ECO MODE]

Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselecttwobrightnessmodesofthelamp:

OFFandONmodes.Thelamplifecanbeextendedbyturningonthe[ECOMODE].

[ECOMODE] Description

[OFF]

Thisisthedefaultsetting(100%Brightness).

[ON] Lowlamppowerconsumption(approx.70%Brightness).

Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:

1. PresstheECObuttonontheremotecontroltodisplay[LIGHTMODE]screen.

2. Use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[ECOMODE].

3. Use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[ON].

4. PresstheENTERbutton.

To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF]. Repeat Step 3.

NOTE:

• The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu.

 Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[LIGHTMODE]→[ECOMODE].

• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].

• [ECOMODE]isalwayssetto[OFF]for1minuteimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedon.Thelampconditionwillnotbeaffected

evenwhen[ECOMODE]ischanged.

• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto

[ON].

• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[OFF]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[ECOMODE]automaticallychangesto[ON]mode

toprotecttheprojector.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMode”.WhentheprojectorisintheForcedEcoMode,thepicturebrightness

decreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsupinorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedat

the bottom right of the screen.

 Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedEcoModeiscancelledandthe[ECOMODE]returnsto[OFF]

mode.

3. Convenient Features

Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]

Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO

emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]

issetto[OFF],or[ON].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBON

SAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO

emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcan

checktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page136)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO

emission reduction between the time of

changingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-

SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:

• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO

emission reduction.

 AmountofCO

emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninONforECOMODE)×

conversionfactor.*WhentheimageisturnedoffwiththeAV-MUTEbuttontheamountofCO

emmission reduction will also

increase.

* CalculationforamountofCO

emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO

EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,

2008Edition”.

• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.

• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.

3. Convenient Features

❻ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion

[CORNERSTONE]

Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleft

orrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

1. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.

Projected image

The drawing shows the upper right corner.

2. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

3. PresstheGeometric.buttoneitheronthecabinetortheremotecontrol.

Display the [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] screen of the on-screen menu.

4. Movethecursoronto[MODE]by▼buttonandpresstheENTER.

The mode selection screen will displayed on.

5. Select[CORNERSTONE]andpresstheENTER.

Go back to display the [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] screen of the on-screen menu.

3. Convenient Features

6. Pressthe▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

The drawing shows the upper left icon ( ) is selected.

The screen will switch to the [CORNERSTONE] screen.

7. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected

imageframe.

8. PresstheENTERbutton.

9. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

.PresstheENTERbutton.

. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.

On the [CORNERSTONE] screen, select [EXIT] or press the EXIT button on the remote control.

3. Convenient Features

The confirmation screen is displayed.

. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This completes the [CORNERSTONE] correction.

• Select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbuttontoreturntothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.

Selecting[CANCEL]willreturntotheadjustmentscreenwithoutsavingchanges(Step3).

Selecting[RESET]willreturntothefactorydefault.

Selecting[UNDO]willexitwithoutsavingchanges.

NOTE:

• Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.

• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].

• InStep11,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Inthestate[CORNERSTONE]hasbeenselectedfor[MODE]inthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]:

• PresstheGeometric.buttonfor2ormoreseconds.

• Run[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.

• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

• AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailableforCORNERSTONEcorrection.

❼ Operation for the On-Screen Menu by a commercially

available USB mouse

OnceacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnectedtothisprojector,itenablestoperformtheoperationforthe

on-screenmenuandthegeometriccorrectioneasily.

NOTE:

• NotguaranteetheperformanceofallUSBmouseavailableonthemarket.

Menu operation

① Displaytheon-screenmenubyrightclick.

② Selectadesiredmenuandperformadjustmentbyleftclick.

 Theadjustmentbarcanbecontrolbydraganddrop.

3. Convenient Features

③ Select[EXIT]displayedatthebottomofthemenubyleftclickfor

goingbacktothepreviouslevel.Ifthecursorisonthemainmenu

option,itworksforclosingthemenu.(Itworksasthesameperfor-

mancewiththe[EXIT]buttonontheremotecontrol.

Menu position control

① Clickthe wheel buttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuindication

frame.

②

 Leftclickatthepositionontheprojectionscreenwhereyouwant

toshifttheon-screenmenu.Thenearestcorneroftheon-screen

menuindicationframewillshifttotheclickedposition.

③ Clickthewheelbuttontoclosethemenuindicationframe.

Geometric correction

TheUSBmousecanbeusedforCORNERSTONECORRECTION,HORIZONTALCORNER,VERTICALCORNER

andWARP.Inthisclause,theCORNERSTONECORRECTIONbyanUSBmouseisexplainedasanexample.

① WhiletheadjustmentscreenoftheCORNERSTONE

CORRECTION is displayed, right click on the pro-

jection screen.The shape of mouse pointerwill be

changedandthecorrectionwillbecomeavailable.

3. Convenient Features

② Leftclickatthescreencorner.Theprojectionscreen

cornerwillmovetothemouseclickedposition.

③ Repeatthestep②forcorrectingalldistortion.After

completionofdistortioncorrection,rightclickonthe

projectionscreen.Theshapeofmousepointerwillbe

changedtonormal.

④ Leftclick[EXIT]onthecorrectionscreentonish.

3. Convenient Features

❽

Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]

AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeyword

isset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-

jectorcannotprojectanimage.

•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

To enable the Security function:

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU(1)].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].

4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.

5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.

6. Typeinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: A keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length.

The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.

3. Convenient Features

7. Typeinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The SECURITY function has been enabled.

To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:

1. PressthePOWERbutton.

The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.

NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.

3. Convenient Features

To disable the SECURITY function:

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

2.Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed.

4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.

When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequest

code.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConrmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]

is a request code.

3. Convenient Features

❾ Projecting 3D videos

Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.In

ordertosynchronizethe3Dvideoandeyewear,acommercially-available3Demitterneedstobeconnectedtothe

projector(ontheprojectorside).

The3Deyewearreceivesinformationfromthe3Demitterandperformsopeningandclosingontheleftandright.

CAUTION

Health precautions

Beforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosed

withthe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationles,etc.).

Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.

• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.

• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclose

tothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.

• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakafterevery

hourofwatching.

• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfrom

seizurescausedbylightsensitivity.

• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-

diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsult

a doctor if the symptoms persist.

• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,this

mayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparations

Pleaseuseanactiveshutter-type3DeyewearthatconformswiththeVESAstandard.

Acommercially-availableRFtypemadebyXpandisrecommended.

3D eyewear �� Xpand X105-RF

3D emitter

�� Xpand AD025-RF-X1

Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projector

1. Connectthevideodevicetotheprojector.

2. Switch on the power supply to the projector.

3. Runthe3Dvideosoftwareandprojectthevideousingtheprojector.

This has been automatically set up when shipped from the factory. When a 3D video cannot be projected, it may

be because the 3D detection signals are not included or because they are not detectable by the projector.

Please manually select the format.

4. Selectthe3Dvideoformat.

(1) Press the “3D Set.” button on the remote control.

3. Convenient Features

The [3D SETTINGS] screen will be displayed.

(2) Press the ▼ button to align the cursor with the [FORMAT] and press the ENTER button.

The format screen will be displayed.

(3) Select the input signal format using the ▼ button and then press the ENTER button.

The 3D settings screen will disappear and the 3D video will be projected.

Press the MENU button and the on-screen menu will disappear.

The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video (default factory setting when

shipped). Please read the “Health Precautions” on the previous page to watch videos in the correct manner. The

screen will disappear after 60 seconds or when the ENTER button is pressed. (→ page 112)

5. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.

A normal video will be shown when a 2D video is input.

To watch a 3D video in 2D, select [OFF(2D)] in the [FORMAT] screen mentioned above in (3).

NOTE:

• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],

[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswill

be maintained.)

• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.

• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.

• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.

• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter.

 Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing

distance, etc.

• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschip

performance are low. Please check the required operating environment of the computer that is stated in the operating manual

attachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.

• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.

3. Convenient Features

When videos cannot be viewed in 3D

Pleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.

Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.

Possible reasons Solutions

The selected signal does not support 3D output� Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D�

The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]� Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a

format that supports 3D�

A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used� Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emitter

(recommended)� (→ page 46)

Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in

3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector�

The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off� Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear�

The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is ﬂat� Please charge or replace the battery�

The viewer is located too far away from the screen� Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vi-

cinity, the projectors may interfere with one another� Alternatively,

there may be a bright light source near the screen�

Please maintain sufﬁcient distance between the projectors�

Please keep the light source away from the screen�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eyewear

and the 3D emitter�

Please remove the obstacle�

The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported� Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents�

3. Convenient Features

❿ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser

Overview

Usingthewebbrowseronthecomputer,theHTTPserverscreenoftheprojectorcanbedisplayedtooperatethe

projector.

Possible operations on the HTTP server screen

• Congurethesettingsrequiredforconnectingtheprojectortothenetwork(wiredLAN).(NETWORKSETTINGS)

• Conguretheemailnotication.(ALERTMAIL)

 Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoanetwork(wiredLAN),noticationsonthelampreplacementperiodandvari-

ous errors are sent to the email address that has been set up.

• Operatetheprojector.

 Operationssuchpoweron/offoftheprojector,inputterminalswitchover,volumecontrol,picturecontrol,andlens

control etc. can be carried out.

• Congurethe[PJLinkPASSWORD],[AMXBEACON],and[CRESTRON]etc.

To view the HTTP server screen

1. ConnecttheprojectortothecomputerwithaLANcablesoldcommercially.(→page152)

2. Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN]intheon-screenmenutoconfigurethenetwork

settings.(→page126)

3. StartupthewebbrowseronyourcomputerandentertheaddressorURLintheinputfield.

Specify the address or URL as “http://<IP Address of Projector>/index.html”.

The basic HTTP server screen will be displayed.

TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE:

• Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.

• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork.

 Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedin

rapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-

tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourweb

browser (or clear the cache).

• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwill

vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help ﬁles and the other information provided in your software.

Preparation before Use

ConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page152)

Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthe

settingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeenset

willnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbe

reectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

3. Convenient Features

Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser

RegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthe

projectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddress

oftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecor-

respondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”leofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetwork

settingbyspecifying

 http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html

fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingby

specifying

 http://192.168.73.1/index.html

fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.

ON �� Power is switched on�

OFF �� Power is switched off�

VOLUME:Thiscontrolsthevolumeoftheprojector.

▲ �� Increases the volume adjustment value for the AUDIO OUT terminal�

▼ �� Decreases the volume adjustment value for the AUDIO OUT terminal�

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.

PICTURE ON �� Mutes the video�

PICTURE OFF �� Cancels the video muting�

SOUND ON �� Mutes the audio from the AUDIO OUT terminal�

SOUND OFF �� Cancels the audio muting from the AUDIO OUT terminal�

ALL ON �� Mutes each of the video, and audio functions for the AUDIO OUT terminal�

ALL OFF �� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio functions for the AUDIO OUT terminal�

3. Convenient Features

PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.

BRIGHTNESS ▲ �� Increases the brightness adjustment value�

BRIGHTNESS ▼ �� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�

CONTRAST ▲ �� Increases the contrast adjustment value�

CONTRAST ▼ �� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�

COLOR ▲ �� Increases the color adjustment value�

COLOR ▼ �� Decreases the color adjustment value�

HUE ▲ �� Increases the hue adjustment value�

HUE ▼ �� Decreases the hue adjustment value�

SHARPNESS ▲ �� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�

SHARPNESS ▼ �� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�

• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page90,

91)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.

HDMI1 �� Switches to the HDMI 1 IN connector�

HDMI2 �� Switches to the HDMI 2 IN connector�

DisplayPort �� Switches to the DisplayPort�

COMPUTER �� Switches to the COMPUTER IN connector�

HDBaseT �� Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT�

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.

LAMP LIFE REMAINING ��Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage�

LAMP HOURS USED ��Displays how many hours the lamp has been used�

FILTER HOURS USED ��Displays how many hours the ﬁlter has been used�

ERROR STATUS ��Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

3. Convenient Features

NETWORK SETTINGS

http://<IPAddressofProjector(Basic)>/index.html

•SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

INTERFACE Select[LAN]forconnectingLANbywirethrutheLANport.

Select[HDBaseT]forconnectingLANbywirethrutheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport.

SETTING SetforwiredLAN.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection.ThePOWERindicatorthatisinformingtheSTANDBY

statewillstarttoblinkinorangelonginterval(→page180).

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyour

DHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetwork

administrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

AUTODNSON DHCPserver willautomatically assign IPaddress ofDNS serverconnected to the

projector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

DNS SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.

3. Convenient Features

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentifytheprojector.A

projectornamemustbe16charactersorless.

TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe

16orless.

DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainname

mustbe60charactersorless.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mail

whenusingwiredLAN.

PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.

ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.

Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:

Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife.

Please replace the lamp.

Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.

ProjectorName:xxxx

LampHoursUsed:xxxx[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS

1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornot

NOTE:

• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork

settings are correct.

• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthis

happen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

3. Convenient Features

•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforget

yourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.

Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)and

passwordduringLOGON.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetwork

supportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:

WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwill

recognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.ONwillenabletocon-

nectwiththeXTPtransmitter.OFFwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.Pleasecheck24digitsserialnumber(XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX)

displayed on the column for the password.

*WhatisPJLink?

PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandard

protocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.

SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

•CRESTRON

ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.

DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.

ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.

CRESTRON CONTROL for managing from the controller.

DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.

Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

UPDATE Reectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

3. Convenient Features

LENS CONTROL

•CONTROL

FOCUS CENTER Alignthefocusaroundtheopticalaxis.

PERIPHERY Alignthefocusforthescreenperipheralarea.

ZOOM

◀/▶

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage.

SHIFT

▼▲◀▶

Adjusttheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition.

HOME Returnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition.

CALIB. Correcttheadjustablezoom,focusandlesshiftrange.

•LENSMEMORY

STORE Storethecurrentadjustedvaluesinmemoryforeachinputsignal.

MOVE AppliestheadjustedvaluesofLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOM,andmotorizedFO-

CUStothecurrentsignal.

RESET Returntheadjustedvaluedtothelastcondition.

•REF.LENSMEMORY

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 Selectastored[PROFILE]number.

STORE StoreeachadjustedvalueofLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOMandmotorizedFOCUS

fortheselectedproleasthecommonvaluesforeveryinputsignal.

MOVE Movethelenstothestoredvaluesfortheselectedprole.

RESET Resetselected[REF.LENSMEMORY]fortheselected[PROFILE]tothedefault

factorysettings.

3. Convenient Features

LOADBY

SIGNAL

OFF Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillnotshifttothelesshift,zoomandfocusval-

uesfortheselected[PROFILE]number.

ON Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillshifttothevaluesfortheselected[PROFILE]

number.

Ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeenstoredto[LENSMEMORY],thelenswillapply

[REF.LENSMEMORY]adjustedvalues.Alternatively,ifnoadjustedvalueshave

beenstoredto[REF.LENSMEMORY],thelenswillstayunmoved.

FORCED

MUTE

OFF Notturnofftheimageduringlesshift.

ON Turnofftheimageduringlesshift.

NOTE:LENSMEMORYandREF.LENSMEMORYarefutureexpansionfunctions.

⓫ Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS

MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvalueswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOMandmotorizedFO-

CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneed

toadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvaluesfor

lensshift,zoom,andfocus.

Functionname Description page

REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoallinputsignals.Atthetimeofinstallation,

twokindsofadjustedvaluescanbestored.

Ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeensavedto[LENSMEMORY],thelens

willapply[REF.LENSMEMORY]adjustedvalues.

→page117

LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.

Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioor

resolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsource

selection.

→page99

NOTE:

• The[LENSMEMORY]featureisnotavailableforthelensunit,NP11FL/NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL/NP30ZL.

• Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

3. Convenient Features

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The [PROFILE] selection screen appears.

3. Convenient Features

6. Pressthe▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Return to the [REF. LENS MEMORY] settings screen.

7. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Select a [PROFILE] number and save the adjusted [LENS SHIFT], [ZOOM], and [FOCUS] values to it.

9. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be closed.

TIP:

• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 99)

3. Convenient Features

To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.

3. Convenient Features

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The [PROFILE] selection screen appears.

6. Pressthe▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Return to the [REF. LENS MEMORY] settings screen.

7. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The lens will shift based on the adjusted values stored in the selected [PROFILE].

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The adjusted values will be applied to the current signal. .

9. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be closed.

3. Convenient Features

TIP:

Tocallupthestoredvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:

1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

During projection, if the adjusted values for an input signal have been saved, the lens will shift. If not, the lens will

shift according to the adjusted values stored in the selected [REF. LENS MEMORY] [PROFILE] number.

Toautomaticallyapplythestoredvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:

1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This will move the lens automatically to the position at the time of source selection according to the adjusted

values.

NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjusted

valuesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingthestoredvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,nelyadjustthelens

shift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projection

Thisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.

Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.

Case 1

Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime

[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]

Case 2

Usingfourprojectors(liquidcrystalpanel:WUXGA)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof3840×2160pixels

[TILING]

Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY

PICTURE]

Connection example and projection image

In the case of [PICTURE BY PICTURE] In the case of [PIP]

On-screen menu operations

Display[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or

[PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page66)

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Case 2. Using four projectors (liquid crystal panel: WUXGA) to project videos with a

resolution of 3840 × 2160 pixels [TILING]

Connection example and projection image

On-screen menu operations

1 Four similar videos are displayed when four projectors are projected.

Please request the retail store to adjust the projection position of each projector.

NOTE:

• Whensettinguptheprojector,assignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.

• Setthe“Colorsetting”and“DeepColorsetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualac-

companiedwithyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.

• ConnectanHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertotherstprojectorandthenconnecttoHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport

of the second and subsequent projectors.

• SelectinganotherinputsourceonthesecondandsubsequentprojectorswilldisabletheHDBaseTrepeaterfunction.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.

Display [DISPLAY] → [MULTI SCREEN] → [PICTURE SETTING] Screen in the on-screen menu and select [TIL-

ING].

(1) In the screen for setting the number of horizontal units, select [2 UNITS]. (number of units in the horizontal

direction)

(2) In the screen for setting the number of vertical units, select [2 UNITS]. (number of units in the vertical direction)

(3) In the screen for setting the horizontal order, select [1st UNIT] or [2nd UNIT].

(look at the screens, the one on the left is the [1st UNIT] while the one on the right is the [2nd UNIT])

(4) In the screen for setting the vertical order, select the [1st UNIT] or the [2nd UNIT].

(look at the screens, the one at the top is the [1st UNIT] while the one at the bottom is the [2nd UNIT])

3 Adjust the lens shift of each projector to fine-tune the boundaries of the screen.

For further fine-tuning, adjust using [DISPLAY] → [EDGE BLENDING] in the on-screen menu for each projector.

For details, please refer to “4-3 Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]”.

(→ page 70)

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Things to note when installing projectors

• Leavesufficientspaceontheleftandrightoftheprojectorsothattheintakeandexhaustventsoftheprojectorare

notobstructed.Whentheintakeandexhaustventsareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrise

and this may result in a malfunction.

• Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontopofoneanotherwheninstallingthem.Whentheprojectorsare

piledupontopofoneanother,theymayfalldown,resultingindamageandfailure.

• Installationexamplewhenusingtwoprojectors

 Thefollowinginstallationisrecommendedwhencombiningtheinstallationoftwoprojectorsformulti-screenprojec-

tion.Pleaseleaveaspaceofatleast10cmbetweenthetheintake/exhaustventandthewall.

[Installationexample]

Intake vent Exhaust vent

CabinetCabinetCabinet

Air dis-

charge

Air intake

Front Right side Back

WARNING

Pleaserequesttheretailstoreforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.

Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdy

cabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectly

on top of one another.

NOTE:

• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 162)

4. Multi-Screen Projection

❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time

Theprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:PIP

modeandPICTUREBYPICTUREmode.

Theprojectionvideointherstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalled

outsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.

Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu

(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page101)

• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.

Picture in Picture function

Asmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.

Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page101)

• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomright

orbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedand

thepositioncanbene-tuned)

• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display

Main Display

Sub-Display

Picture by picture function

Displaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.

Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→

page102)

• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display

• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display

Main Display Sub-Display

Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub-screen.

Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.

• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.

Sub-Display or additional display

HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort COMPUTER HDBaseT

Main Display

HDMI1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes

HDMI2 Yes No Yes Yes Yes

DisplayPort Yes Yes No Yes Yes

COMPUTER Yes Yes Yes No Yes

HDBaseT Yes Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE:

• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Projecting two screens

1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

This displays the [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen in the on-screen menu.

2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲buttons,andpresstheENTERbutton.

This displays the [SUB INPUT] screen.

3. Selecttheinputsignalusingthe▼/▲buttons,andpresstheENTERbutton.

* This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model.

The [PIP] (PICTURE IN PICTURE) or [PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen set up under [MODE] is projected. (→

page 101)

• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.

• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIPbuttonorPBP/POPbuttonontheremotecontrol.

4. Press the MENU button.

The on-screen menu will disappear.

5. Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect

[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.

TIP:

• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack

screen.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa

1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

This displays the [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen in the on-screen menu.

2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲buttonsandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Display the screen for switching the display positions.

3. Select[ON]usingthe▼buttonandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

The video of the main display will switch with that of the sub-display.

When turned “OFF” When turned “ON”

Sub-display video

Main display video Sub-display video

Main display video

The signal output from the HDBaseT OUT/Ethernet terminal does not change even if the display positions are

switched.

4. Press the menu button.

The on-screen menu will disappear.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Restrictions

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.

• Audio-visualadjustments

• Videomagnication/compressionusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.

 However,magnication/compressionisuptothepositionssetin[PICTUREBYPICTUREBORDER]only.

• TESTPATTERN

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-

plied individually.

• Momentarydeletionofvideo/audio

• Videopause

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.

• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[DYNAMICCONTRAST]cannotbeused.

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1200ormore.

• TheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetporthasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolu-

tion of the connected monitor and projector.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]

Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,

top and bottom.

Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojection

screenindistinguishable.

NOTE:

• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage162.

• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquarein

the appropriate size, and then make optical adjustments (lens shift, focus, and zoom).

• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[REF.LIGHT]under[LIGHTMODE].Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]to

adjustthe[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS]and[UNIFORMITY].

Before explaining use of the Edge Blending function

Thissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageon

theleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwise

speciedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.

Example: Placing two projectors side by side

Edge Blending area

Projected area

Projector A Projector B

4. Multi-Screen Projection

Preparation:

• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.

• Whenperformingsettingsoradjustmentsusingoneremotecontrol,enablethe[CONTROLID]forassigningIDto

each projector so as not to activate the other projectors. (→page123)

Setting the overlap of projection screens

① Enable [EDGE BLENDING].

1 Pressthe“EdgeBlend.”button.

The [EDGE BLENDING] screen will be displayed. Align the cursor with [MODE] and then press the ENTER but-

ton. The mode screen will be displayed.

2 Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This enables the Edge Blending function. The following menu items are available:

[TOP], [BOTTOM], [LEFT], [RIGHT], [BLACK LEVEL], and [BLEND CURVE]

3 Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.

Press the ENTER button.

The following items are available:

[CONTROL], [MARKER], [RANGE], and [POSITION]

4. Multi-Screen Projection

4 Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Each [TOP], [BOTTOM], [LEFT], [RIGHT], and [BLACK LEVEL] has its own [CONTROL], [MARKER], [RANGE],

and [POSITION].

• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,

set the [CONTROL] for the [TOP], [RIGHT] and [BOTTOM] to [OFF].

② Adjust [RANGE] and [POSITION] to determine an area of overlapped edges of images

projected from each projector.

Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.

Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].

[RANGE]

(Determine an area of overlapped edges of

images.)

[POSITION]

(Determine the position of overlapped edges of images.)

Green marker

Turn on [RIGHT]

Magenta marker

Turn on [LEFT]

Magenta marker

* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

1 Adjust[RANGE].

Use the ◀ or ▶ button to adjust the overlapped area.

TIP:

• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.

2 Adjust[POSITION].

Use the ◀ or ▶ button to align one edge with the other edge of overlapped images.

TIP:

• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.

• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.

• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.

[BLEND CURVE]

Adjustthebrightnessoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens.Accordingtothenecessity,adjustthebrightnessof

theoverlappedsectiononthescreensbythe[BLENDCURVE]AND[BLACKLEVEL].

• Setthe[MODE]to[ON]forselecting[BLENDCURVE]and[BLACKLEVEL].

Selectinganoptionforthe[BLENDCURVE]

Bycontrollingthegraduationoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens,itmakestheborderontheprojectedscreens

inconspicuous.Selecttheoptimaloptionamongnine.

1. OntheOn-ScreenMenu,movethecursorontothe[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLENDCURVE]and

thenpresstheENTER.Theoptionsettingscreenforthe[BRENDCURVE]isdisplayedon.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

2. Selectoneoptionamongnineby▲ or ▼.

Black Level Adjustment

Thisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).

Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.

NOTE:

Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.

Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.

Example: Adjusting the Black Level when placing two projectors side by side

Width of overlap

Adjust [CENTER] Adjust [CENTER]

Projector A’s

image

Projector B’s

image

Adjust [CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust [CENTER-LEFT]

1. Select[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The screen will switch to the black level adjustment screen.

4. Multi-Screen Projection

2. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶toadjusttheblacklevel.

Do this for the other projector if necessary.

9-segmented portions for Black Level adjustment

Thecenterprojector

Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportions

for the left bottom projector as shown below.

TOP-LEFT

BOTTOM-LEFT

CENTER-

LEFT

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

CENTER

BOTTOM-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

TIP:

• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblending

positionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivision

screen appears.

• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomends

orleft/rightends.

• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❶ Using the Menus

NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.

NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶ in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.

2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirst

tab.

4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or

set.

 Youcanusethe◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.

5. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.

6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the

projector cabinet.

Changes are stored until adjusted again.

7. Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojector

cabinet to quit the menu display.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

 Toreturntothepreviousmenu,presstheEXITbutton.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❷

Menu Elements

Slide bar

Solid triangle

Menu mode

Ta b

Radio button

High Altitude symbol

ECO mode symbol

Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:

Highlight �� Indicates the selected menu or item�

Solid triangle ��Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active�

Tab ��Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�

Radio button �� Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�

Source ��Indicates the currently selected source�

Menu mode ��Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�

Off Timer remaining time �� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�

Slide bar ��Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�

ECO mode symbol ��Indicates [ECO MODE] is set�

Key Lock symbol ��Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�

Thermometer symbol ��Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high�

High Altitude symbol ��Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�

Source

Available buttons

Thermometer symbol

Key Lock symbol

Off Timer remaining

time

Highlight

5. Using On-Screen Menu

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.

*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].

*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].

*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.

*4 The[INPUTRESOLUTION]itemcanbeselectedforCOMPUTERinput.

*5 The[HDRMODE]itemisavailableexclusivelyfor4Ksignal.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.

❸ List of Menu Items

Somemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.

Menu Item Default Options

INPUT

1:HDMI1 *

2:HDMI2 *

3:DisplayPort *

4:COMPUTER *

5:HDBaseT

ENTRY LIST

TEST PATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL

PRESET *

HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB,

DICOM SIM�

DETAIL SETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE *

AUTO, HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC,

sRGB, DICOM SIM�

GAMMA CORRECTION*

DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAIL

SCREEN SIZE*

* LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

COLOR TEMPERATURE*

DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, MOTION IMAGE, STILL IMAGE

LIGHT ADJUST *

WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST R 0

CONTRAST G 0

CONTRAST B 0

BRIGHTNESS R 0

BRIGHTNESS G 0

BRIGHTNESS B 0

COLOR CORRECTION

RED 0

GREEN 0

BLUE 0

YELLOW 0

MAGENTA 0

CYAN 0

CONTRAST 50

BRIGHTNESS 50

SHARPNESS 10

COLOR 50

HUE 0

VOLUME

RESET

IMAGE

OPTIONS

CLOCK *

PHASE *

HORIZONTAL *

VERTICAL *

BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHT

OVERSCAN AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]

ASPECT RATIO

AUTO

(COMPUTER) AUTO, NORMAL, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, FULL,

NATIVE

AUTO

(HDTV/SDTV) AUTO, NORMAL, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN,

ZOOM, FULL

INPUT RESOLUTION*

* –

VIDEO

NOISE REDUCTION

RANDOM NR * OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH

MOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH

BLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH

DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILL

CONTRAST

ENHANCEMENT

MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMAL

GAIN

SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, REC601, REC709, REC2020

VIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITE

HDR MODE*

AUTO AUTO, OFF, ON

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

ADJUST

3D SETTINGS

STEREO VIEWER SINGLE SINGLE, DUAL LEFT, DUAL RIGHT

STEREO FILTER SINGLE SINGLE, DUAL LEFT, DUAL RIGHT

FORMAT AUTO

AUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE

BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE

ALTERNATIVE

L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON

LENS

MEMORY

STORE

MOVE

RESET

DISPLAY

PIP/PICTURE

BY PICTURE

SUB INPUT OFF OFF, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT

MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTURE

PICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON

PIP SETTING

START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL POSITION

VERTICAL POSITION

SIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

BORDER

GEOMETRIC

CORRECTION

MODE OFF

OFF, KEYSTONE, CORNERSTONE, HORIZONTAL CORNER,

VERTICAL CORNER, WARP, PC TOOL

KEYSTONE

HORIZONTAL

VERTICAL

TILT

THROW RATIO

CORNERSTONE

TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT,

BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL CORNER

TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT,

BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

VERTICAL CORNER

TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT,

BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

WARP

TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT,

BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

PC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3

RESET

EDGE

BLENDING

MODE OFF OFF, ON

TOP

CONTROL ON OFF, ON

MARKER OFF OFF, ON

RANGE

POSITION

BOTTOM

CONTROL ON OFF, ON

MARKER OFF OFF, ON

RANGE

POSITION

LEFT

CONTROL ON OFF, ON

MARKER OFF OFF, ON

RANGE

POSITION

RIGHT

CONTROL ON OFF, ON

MARKER OFF OFF, ON

RANGE

POSITION

BLACK LEVEL

TOP-LEFT

TOP-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-LEFT

CENTER

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT

BOTTOM-CENTER

BOTTOM-RIGHT

BLEND CURVE 5 OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

DISPLAY

MULTI

SCREEN

WHITE BALANCE

MODE OFF OFF, ON

CONTRAST W

CONTRAST R

CONTRAST G

CONTRAST B

BRIGHTNESS W

BRIGHTNESS R

BRIGHTNESS G

BRIGHTNESS B

PICTURE SETTING

MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL ZOOM

VERTICAL ZOOM

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

VERTICAL POSITION

TILING

WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITS

HEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITS

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

VERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

SETUP

MENU(1)

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA,

日本語

DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI,

NEDERLANDS, SUOMI

NORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ,

, Ελληνικά, 简体中文, 한국어

ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, , ไทย,

, 繁體中文, Tiếng Việt

COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROME

INPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ON

MESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ON

ID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON

ECO MESSAGE OFF OFF, ON

3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON

DISPLAY TIME

AUTO 45

SEC

MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC

FILTER MESSAGE OFF

OFF, 100[H], 500[H], 2000[H], 4000[H], 5000[H], 6000[H],

7000[H], 10000[H]

MENU(2)

MENU ANGLE 0°, 90°, 270°

MENU POSITION

HORIZONTAL POSITION

VERTICAL POSITION

RESET

INSTALLATION

ORIENTATION AUTO

AUTO, DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR,

CEILING FRONT

SCREEN

SCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREEN

POSITION

WALL COLOR OFF

OFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT

YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE,

PINK

FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE

LIGHT MODE

ECO MODE OFF OFF, ON

REF� LIGHT ADJUST

REF� WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST R

CONTRAST G

CONTRAST B

BRIGHTNESS R

BRIGHTNESS G

BRIGHTNESS B

UNIFORMITY R

UNIFORMITY B

STATIC CONVERGENCE

HORIZONTAL R

HORIZONTAL G

HORIZONTAL B

VERTICAL R

VERTICAL G

VERTICAL B

REF� LENS MEMORY

PROFILE 1 1, 2

STORE

MOVE

RESET

LOAD BY SIGNAL OFF OFF, ON

FORCED MUTE OFF OFF, ON

LENS CALIBRATION

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP CONTROL

TOOLS

ADMINISTRA-

TOR MODE

MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASIC

NOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ON

NEW PASSWORD

CONFIRM PASSWORD

PROGRAM

TIMER

ENABLE OFF OFF, ON

SETTINGS

EDIT

ACTIVE OFF, ON

DAY

SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT,

EVERY DAY

TIME

FUNCTION POWER, INPUT, ECO MODE

ADVANCED

SETTINGS

POWER OFF, ON

SOURCE HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT

ECO MODE OFF, ON

REPEAT OFF, ON

DELETE

DOWN

BACK

DATE AND TIME

SETTINGS

TIME

ZONE

SETTIMGS

UTC

-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30,

-08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30,

-04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30,

00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30,

+04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30,

+08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30,

+12:00, +12:30, +13:00

DATE

AND TIME

SETTINGS

DATE MM/DD/YYYY

TIME HH:MM

INTERNET TIME

SERVER

OFF, ON

IP ADDRESS

UPDATE

SUMMER

TIME

SETTINGS

ENABLE OFF, ON

MON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(START)

FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST

WEEK

SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(START)

MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(EXIT)

FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST

WEEK

SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(EXIT)

TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00

MOUSE

BUTTON RIGHT HAND RIGHT HAND, LEFT HAND

SENSITIVITY MEDIUM FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW

CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ON

SECURITY OFF OFF, ON

COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

CONTROL ID

CONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254

CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON, AUTO

REMOTE SENSOR

FRONT/

BACK

FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBase-T

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

NETWORK

SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

INTERFACE LAN, HDBaseT

PROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2

DHCP OFF, ON

IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

GATEWAY

AUTO DNS OFF, ON

DNS CONFIGURATION

RECONNECT

PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PJ-********

DOMAIN

HOST NAME pj-********

DOMAIN NAME

ALERT MAIL

ALERT MAIL OFF, ON

HOST NAME

DOMAIN NAME

SENDER'S ADDRESS

SMTP SERVER NAME

RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1

RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2

RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3

TEST MAIL

NETWORK SERVICE

HTTP

SERVER

NEW PASSWORD

CONFIRM PASSWORD

PJLink

NEW PASSWORD

CONFIRM PASSWORD

AMX BEACON OFF, ON

CREST-

RON

ROOMVIEW

CRESTRON CONTROL CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID

Extron XTP OFF, ON

SOURCE

OPTIONS

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

AUDIO SELECT

HDMI1 HDMI1 HDMI1, COMPUTER

HDMI2 HDMI2 HDMI2, COMPUTER

DisplayPort DisplayPort DisplayPort, COMPUTER

HDBaseT HDBaseT HDBaseT, COMPUTER

DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT

SEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF OFF, ON

BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGO

HDBaseT OUT SELECT AUTO AUTO, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, HDBaseT

EDIT VERSION

HDMI1 MODE1 MODE1, MODE2

HDMI2 MODE1 MODE1, MODE2

HDCP VERSION

HDMI1

HDCP2�2 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4

HDMI2 HDCP2�2 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4

HDBaseT HDCP1�4 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4

POWER

OPTIONS

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, SLEEP

DIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ON

AUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT

AUTO POWER OFF 0:15 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00

OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

RESET

CURRENT SIGNAL

ALL DATA

ALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)

CLEAR LAMP HOURS

CLEAR FILTER HOURS

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

INFO�

USAGE TIME

LAMP LIFE REMAINING

LAMP HOURS USED

FILTER HOURS USED

TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINAL

RESOLUTION

HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY

VERTICAL FREQUENCY

SYNC TYPE

SYNC POLARITY

SCAN TYPE

SOURCE NAME

ENTRY NO�

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPE

BIT DEPTH

VIDEO LEVEL

SAMPLING FREQUENCY

3D FORMAT

SOURCE(3)

INPUT TERMINAL

RESOLUTION

HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY

VERTICAL FREQUENCY

SYNC POLARITY

SYNC TYPE

SOURCE NAME

ENTRY NO�

SOURCE(4)

SIGNAL TYPE

BIT DEPTH

VIDEO LEVEL

SAMPLING FREQUENCY

3D FORMAT

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

GATEWAY

MAC ADDRESS

VERSION

FIRMWARE

DATA

FIRMWARE(2)

OTHERS

DATE TIME

PROJECTOR NAME

MODEL NO�

SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL ID*

DETECTED PROJECTORS

LENS ID

CONDITIONS

INTAKE TEMPERATURE

EXHAUST TEMPERATURE

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

INSTALLATION POSITION

X-AXIS

Y-AXIS

Z-AXIS

HDBaseT

SIGNAL QUALITY

OPERATION MODE

LINK STATUS

HDMI STATUS

*5 [CONTROLID]willbedisplayedwhen[CONTROLID]hasbeensetup.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]

1:HDMI1

ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMI1INterminal.

2:HDMI2

ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMI2INterminal.

3:DisplayPort

ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputterminal.

4:COMPUTER

Thisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtothecomputervideoinputterminal.

(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

5:HDBaseT

ProjectingtheHDBaseTsignal.

ENTRY LIST

Displaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.

TEST PATTERN

Closesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Entry List

Whenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjust-

mentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.

However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredinthe

EntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete

(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

Displaying the Entry list

1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT].

The INPUT list will be displayed.

* This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model.

3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The ENTRY LIST windows will be displayed.

If the ENTRY LIST window is not displayed, switch the menu to [ADVANCED].

To switch the menu between [ADVANCED] and [BASIC], select [SETUP] → [CONTROL] → [TOOLS] → [AD-

MINISTRATOR MODE] → [MENU MODE]. (→ page 113)

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Entering the currently projected signal into the Entry List [ (STORE)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[ (STORE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Calling up a signal from the Entry List [ (LOAD)]

Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

Editing a signal from the Entry List [ (EDIT)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtoedit.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (EDIT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The Edit window will be displayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.

INPUT The input terminal can be changed. Switching between HDMI/DisplayPort/Computer/

HDBaseTispossible.

LOCK

Setsothattheselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen[ (ALLDELETE)]isexecuted.

ThechangesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.

SKIP

Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Cutting a signal from the Entry List [ (CUT)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtodelete.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (CUT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The signal will be deleted from the Entry List and the deleted signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bot-

tom of the Entry List.

NOTE:

• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.

• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:

• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.

• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

Copying and pasting a signal from the Entry List [ (COPY)]/[ (PASTE)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtocopy.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (COPY)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The copied signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List.

3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.

4. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignal.

5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (PASTE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Data on the clipboard will be pasted to the signal.

Deleting all the signals from the Entry List [ (ALLDELTE)]

1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (ALLDELETE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation message will be displayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.

Using Test Pattern [TEST PATTERN]

Displaysthetestpatternforadjustingdistortiononthescreenandthefocusatthetimeoftheprojectorsetup.Once

the[TESTPATTERN]ontheonscreenmenuisselected,thepatternforadjustmentwillbedisplayedon.Ifyound

distortiononthepattern,adjusttheprojectorinstallationangleorcorrectdistortionbypressingtheGeometric.button

ontheremote.Ifthefocusadjustmentisrequired,presstheFOCUSbuttonontheremotecontrolfordisplayingthe

FOCUSadjustmentscreenandthenadjustFOCUSby◀ or ▶button.Recommendtoperformthefocusadjustment

afterleavingtheprojectorunderthestatetheTESTPATTERNhasbeenprojectedforover30minutes.PressEXIT

button to close the test pattern and return to the menu.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]

[PICTURE]

[MODE]

Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD �� Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 7)

PROFESSIONAL

�� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�

NOTE:

• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.

[PRESET]

Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.

Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.

Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]toset

useradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.

Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].

AUTO �� Automatically distinguish the optimal setting for the input signal�

HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�

PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint ﬁle�

VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�

MOVIE �� Recommended for movies�

GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics�

sRGB �� Standard color values

DICOM SIM� �� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

NOTE:

• The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.

• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-

ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).

The standard speciﬁes how digital image data can be moved from system to system.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[DETAIL SETTINGS]

[GENERAL]

StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]

Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].

First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-

TURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�

PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint ﬁle�

VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�

MOVIE �� Recommended for movies�

GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics�

sRGB �� Standard color values�

DICOM SIM� �� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]

Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:

DYNAMIC �� Creates a high-contrast picture�

NATURAL �� Natural reproduction of the picture�

BLACK DETAIL �� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]

Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE �� For screen size of 150"

MEDIUM

�� For screen size of 100"

SMALL

�� For screen size of 50"

NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]

Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.

Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetin100Kunits.

NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]

Whenset,themostoptimalcontrastratioisadjustedaccordingtothevideo.

OFF �� Dynamic contrast is disabled�

MOTION IMAGE �� Most optimal settings for moving images�

STILL IMAGE �� Most optimal settings for static images� Rapidly follows any changes in the video�

NOTE:

• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.

AdjustingBrightness[LIGHTADJUST]

Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[PROFESSIONAL]isselectedfor[MODE].

Adjusting White Balance [WHITE BALANCE]

Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;

Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

[COLOR CORRECTION]

Correctsthecolorforallsignals.

Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection

−Direction Yellowdirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

GREEN HUE

+Direction Yellowdirection

−Direction Cyandirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

BLUE HUE

+Direction Cyandirection

−Direction Magentadirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

YELLOW HUE

+Direction Reddirection

−Direction Greendirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

MAGENTA HUE

+Direction Bluedirection

−Direction Reddirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

CYAN HUE

+Direction Greendirection

−Direction Bluedirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid

−Direction Weak

[CONTRAST]

Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]

Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SHARPNESS]

Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]

Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

[HUE]

Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

NOTE:

• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.

[RESET]

Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorydefaultsettingswiththeexceptionofthe

following;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.

Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselected

will not be reset.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[IMAGE OPTIONS]

Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]

ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK �� Use this item to ﬁne tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This

function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�

This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the ﬁrst time�

PHASE �� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is

evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)

Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]

Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

• Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthecur-

rentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,its

adjustments will be called up and applied.

 Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[SETUP]→[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]

and reset the adjustments.

[BLANKING]

Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]

Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projected image

Overscaned by 10%

NOTE:

• The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable:

 -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Selecting the Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]

Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’slateral:longitudinalaspectratio.

Theprojectorautomaticallyidentiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

For Computer signal

ForHDTV/SDTVsignals

Resolution AspectRatio

VGA 640×480 4:3

SVGA

800×600 4:3

XGA

1024×768 4:3

WXGA

1280×768 15:9

WXGA

1280×800 16:10

HD(FWXGA)

1366×768 approx.16:9

WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10

SXGA

1280×1024 5:4

SXGA+

1400×1050 4:3

WXGA++

1600×900 16:9

UXGA

1600×1200 4:3

WSXGA+

1680×1050 16:10

FHD(1080P)

1920×1080 16:9

WUXGA

1920×1200 16:10

WQXGA

2560×1600 16:10

QuadHD 3840×2160 16:9

QuadHD 4096×2160 19:7

Options Function

AUTO

Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.

Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,select

theappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

NORMAL Theimageisdisplayedinitsoriginalaspectratioofitsinputsignal..

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.

5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio

16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Options Function

15:9

Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio

16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio

NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasa

lowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page2)

Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,the

centerofanimagewillbedisplayed.

LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstotthe

screen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.

Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

FULL Projecttofullscreensize.

TIP:

• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.

• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect

ratio for a vide source.

 Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formovielm.

• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[INPUT RESOLUTION]

Theresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminal

(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[VIDEO]

Using Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]

Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughness

anddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingto

thetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or

[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.

RANDOM NR �� Reduces ﬂickering random noise in an image�

MOSQUITO NR �� Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback�

BLOCK NR �� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns�

Selecting Interlaced Progressive Conversion Process Mode [DEINTERLACE]

Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

NORMAL �� Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image� Please select

[MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises�

MOVIE �� Select when projecting moving images� This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise�

STILL �� Select when projecting static images� The video will ﬂicker when a moving image is projected�

[CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT]

Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.

OFF �� Suite vision is switched off�

AUTO �� Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function�

NORMAL �� Adjust the gain manually�

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SIGNAL TYPE]

SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecolorof

theimageremainsunnatural.

AUTO �� Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals�

RGB �� Switches to the RGB input�

REC601 �� Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec601 standard�

Setting appropriate to SDTV images�

REC709 �� Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec709 standard�

Setting appropriate to Hi-Vision images�

REC2020 �� Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec2020 standard�

Setting appropriate to 4K images�

[VIDEOLEVEL]

SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMI1INterminal,HDMI2INterminal,

DisplayPortinputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.

AUTO �� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�

Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to [NORMAL”

or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�

NORMAL �� This disables the enhanced mode�

ENHANCED �� This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�

SUPER WHITE �� The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic�

[HDR MODE]

AUTO �� Automatically distinguishes HDR signal�

OFF �� Projects the image based on the input signal

�� Projects the image conforming to the HDR signal

Note:Theseoptionsareavailableexclusivelyfor4Ksignal.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3D SETTINGS]

Pleasereferto“3-9Projecting3Dvideos”(→page46)fortheoperation.

STEREOVIEWER

Stackupasingleormultipleprojectorsandcarryoutthesettingsforprojecting3Dvideos.Selecttheleft/rightset-

tingsofthe3Deyewearusingthestereoviewer.

SINGLE �� Use a single projector to project 3D videos�

DUAL LEFT �� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left�

DUAL RIGHT �� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right�

STEREO FILTER

Stackupasingle ormultipleprojectorsand carry outthesettingsfor projecting 3Dvideos.Imagesetting for 3D

glassesmadebyIntec.

SINGLE �� Use a single projector to project 3D videos�

DUAL LEFT �� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left�

DUAL RIGHT �� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right�

FORMAT

Selectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-

mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannot

bedistinguished.

L/RINVERT

Invertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.

Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-

CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneed

toadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.

STORE �� Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal�

MOVE �� Applies the adjusted values to the current signal�

RESET �� Returns the adjusted values to the last condition�

• ThelensunitsNP11FL,NP12ZL,NP13ZL,NP14ZL,andNP30ZLdonotsupportthisfunction.

NOTE:

• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.Theselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfrom

theENTRYLIST.(→ page 85)

 Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-

ments. This deletion will not take effect until other adjustments is loaded.

• Forstoringeachadjustmentoflensshift,motorizedzoomandmotorizedfocusascommonvalueforallinputsignal,storethem

as reference lens memory.

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[LENSMEMORY]:

1. Projecttheconnecteddevicesignalyouwanttoadjust.

2. Adjusttheprojectingimageofposition,sizeandfocusbytheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITION,ZOOM+/−,and

FOCUS+/−buttons.

• Adjustmentcanbeperformedbytheremotecontrol.Pleasereferto“AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition”

on page 21.

• Slightadjustmentbymovingtheprojectorpositionandbythetiltfootisnotsubjectof[LENSMEMORY].

3.Movethecursoron[STORE]andpressENTER.

4.Movethecursoron[YES]andpressENTER.

100

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:

1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

During projection, if the adjusted values for an input signal have been saved, the lens will shift. If not, the lens will

shift according to the adjusted values stored in the selected [REF. LENS MEMORY] [PROFILE] number.

Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:

1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]and

presstheENTERbutton.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This will move the lens automatically to the position at the time of source selection according to the adjusted

values.

NOTE:

• TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjusted

valuesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,nelyadjustthe

lens shift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.

101

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY]

[PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

SUB INPUT

Selecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.

Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page66)fordetailsontheoperation.

MODE

SelecteitherPIP(PICTUREINPICTURE)orPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.

PICTURE SWAP

Thevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.

Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page68)fordetails.

PIP SETTING

Selectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.

START POSITION �� Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen�

HORIZONTAL POSITION

�� Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction� The respective corners will serve

as reference points�

VERTICAL POSITION

�� Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction� The respective corners will serve as

reference points�

SIZE �� Select the display size of the sub-display�

102

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:

Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFT

is adjusted, the position is displayed with the same amount of movement even if displayed with other starting positions.

The maximum amount of movement is half the resolution of the projector.

Reference point

Adjust using the horizon-

tal position

Sub-display Main display

Reference point

Adjust using the vertical position

TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT

Reference pointReference point

BORDER

Selectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.

Display boundary

Main display

Sub-displayMain display

Sub-display

Main displaySub-display

TIP:

• ForWUXGAtype,sevenoptionsfromzerotosixareavailable.

• ForWXGAtype/XGAtype,threeoptionsfromzerototwoareavailable.

103

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]

MODE

Setpatternforcorrectingdistortion.If[OFF]isselected,the[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]becomesineffective.

Ifyouneedtochangeeitherthe[MENUANGLE]or[MENUPOSITION],makesuretochangethesebeforeperforming

the[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].Ifeitherofthemischangedafterperformingthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],

corrected values will be reset to the default values.

KEYSTONE

Correctdistortioninhorizontalandverticaldirections.

HORIZONTAL �� Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the

screen�

VERTICAL �� Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to

the screen�

TILT �� Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction

using the lens shift�

THROW RATIO �� Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used�

Model name of lens

unit

Adjustmentrange

NP11FL 8

NP30ZL 8–10

NP12ZL 12–15

NP13ZL 15–30

NP14ZL 29–47

NP40ZL 8-11

NP41ZL 13-30

NP43ZL 30-60

NOTE:

• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradient

of the device is changed.

• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarried out by[KEYSTONE],thebrightnessmaybe reduced orthescreenqualitymaydeteriorate

sometimes.

104

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CORNERSTONE

Displaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.

Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page38)fordetails

on the operation.

HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNER

Distortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.

HORIZONTAL CORNER

�� Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�

VERTICAL CORNER

�� Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�

NOTE:

• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleas

the deterioration in the image quality increases as the distortion adjustment volume gets larger.

• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandright

sidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommended

for projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

105

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjustment method

1. Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursor(yellowbox)withthetargetadjustmentpointandthenpress

theENTERbutton.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).

Explanation of screen transition

• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.

• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].

HORIZONTAL CORNER: When Point b in the drawing is moved, and the upper side and Point g are moved,

the lower side will move in a parallel manner.

VERTICAL CORNER: When Point d in the drawing is moved, and the left side and Point e are moved, the right

side will move in a parallel manner.

[Adjustment points of the [HORIZONTAL CORNER] screen and movement points of the projection screen]

Point b will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a, b, c

Point g will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f, g, h

[Adjustment points of the [VERTICAL CORNER] screen and movement points of the projection screen]

Point d will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a, d, f

Point e will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f, g, h

4. Start from Step 2 onwards to adjust the other points.

5. Whentheadjustmentiscompleted,pressthe▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]inthead-

justmentscreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.

TIP:

AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailabletoperformcorrection.(→ page 40)

106

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WARP

Correctprojectedimagedistortiononaspecicsurfaceasacolumnorasphere.

NOTE:

• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangle

since the more the adjustment volume gets large, the more image quality gets deterioration.

• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweenperipheriesandthecenterofthescreen

forprojectionscuttingacrosscornersasonacolumnorasphere.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedfor

projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

Adjustment method

1. Alignthecursorwiththe[WARP]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuandthepresstheENTER.

• Adjustmentscreenwillbedisplayedon.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursor(bluebox)withthetargetadjustmentpointandthenpressthe

ENTER.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTER.

• Thecursorwillbacktoyellowbox.

Explanation for correcting distortion

• Eightadjustmentpointscanbemovedindependently.

• Forleftandrightsides,use◀/▶ buttons for adjusting the range of distortion, and ▼/▲ buttons for adjusting

the distortion peak.

• Fortopandbottomsides,use▼/▲ buttons for adjusting the range of distortion, and ◀/▶ buttons for adjusting

the distortion peak.

• Forcorners,use▼▲◀▶ buttons for moving positions.

4. Foradjustingotherpoints,repeatStep2onwards.

5. Whentheadjustmentiscompleted,movethecursorontothe[EXIT]ontheadjustmentscreenandpress

theENTER.

• Thescreenwillbeswitchedtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menu.

The adjustment completion screen will be displayed on.

6. Press◀ or ▶buttontomovethecursoronto[OK]thenpress[ENTER].

• TheadjustedvaluesforWARParestoredandthescreendisplaygoesbacktothe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION].

TIP:

AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailabletoperformcorrection.(→ page 40)

107

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PC TOOL

Recallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.

Threetypesofcorrectiondatacanberegistered.

NOTE:

• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedoutingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe

degraded.

RESET

ResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeensetupasMODEinGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntotheinitialvalue).

• ThisisineffectivewhenMODEissetOFF.

• ResetcanbeexecutedbypressingandholdingtheGeometericbuttonontheremotecontrolforover2seconds.

108

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[EDGE BLENDING]

Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-

tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.

MODE

ThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.

WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHT,BLACKLEVELandBLENDCURVEsettingscanbe

adjusted.

TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHT

ThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.

Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page70)

CONTROL �� Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions�

MARKER �� Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position� When turned on, a

magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position

will be displayed�

RANGE �� Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending�

POSITION �� Adjust the display position of the edge blending�

BLACKLEVEL

Dividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.

TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,

BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page74)

BLENDCURVE

SetbrightnessfortheEDGEBLENDINGsections.(→page73)

109

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MULTI SCREEN]

WHITE BALANCE

Thisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.

Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].

CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B

�� Adjusting the white color of the video�

BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B

�� Adjusting the black color of the video�

PICTURE SETTING

Thissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.

Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page62)fordetails.

MODE OFF Use the projector in a standalone state.

ZOOM

Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedge

blendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.

TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalso

be set automatically.

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL

ZOOM

Thisenlargesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICAL

ZOOM

Thisenlargesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALPO-

SITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.

HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearranged

horizontally.

VERTICALPO-

SITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearranged

vertically.

110

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Conditions for using tiling

• Alltheprojectorsneedtofullthefollowingconditions.

• Thepanelsizemustbethesame

• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame

• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.

• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame

• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame

 Ifthetilingconditionsaresatised,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomati-

callyextractedandprojected.

 Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatised,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusing

thezoomfunction.

• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.

• Setthe“Colorsetting”and“DeepColorsetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner's

manualaccompaniedwithyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.ConnectanHDMIoutputsignal

ofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertotherstprojectorandthenconnecttotheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetporton

therstprojectortotheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetportonthesecondprojector,sametothesequelprojectors..

Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2

Horizontal order = Second unit

Vertical order = First unit

111

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[MENU(1)]

Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]

Youcanchooseoneof30languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]

Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

Turning On / Off Source Display [INPUT DISPLAY]

ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI1,HDMI2,DisplayPort,COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobe

displayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turning messages on and off [MESSAGE DISPLAY]

Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.

Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthe

securitylockiscanceled.

Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY]

ID DISPLAY �� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed� (→ page 123)

112

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE]

Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.

TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessage

topromptyoutoselect[ON]for[ECOMODE].

When[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]

Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor

30seconds.

When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]

PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page36)

Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.

[3D CAUTION MESSAGE]

Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.

ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.

OFF �� The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed�

ON �� The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video� Press the ENTER button

to cancel the message�

• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-

pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video�

Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]

Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.The

presetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthe

factory preset.

Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message [FILTER MESSAGE]

Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthelters.Clean

thelterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page153)

Fiveoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],2000[H],4000[H],5000[H],6000[H],7000[H],10000[H]

Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

113

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MENU(2)]

[MENU ANGLE]

Selectthedirectionfordisplayingthemenu.

[MENU POSITION]

Shiftthemenudisplayingposition.

HORISONTAL POSITION ��Shift the menu in the horizontal directions�

VERTICAL POSITION ��Shift the menu in the vertical directions�

RESET ��Reset the menu displaying position to the default factory setting (the screen center)�

TIP

• Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,themenudisplayingpositionwillresettothedefaultfactorysetting.

• Inputterminalandmessagedisplayingpositionarenotinuencedbythe[MENUPOSITION].

• ItenablestomovethemenubymouseclickwhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnected.

• Itenablestomovethemenupositionbythe▼▲◀ and ▶buttonsholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrolor

mouse click.

• WhiletheMENUPOSITIONoftheon-screenmenuisdisplayedonandthemenuismovedbythe▼▲◀ and ▶ buttons holding

topresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol,theindicationofadjustedvalueonthemenuwillnotbechanged.Inthiscase,

closetheMENUPOSITIONmenuonceanddisplayitagainforindicatingtheadjustedvalueproperly.

114

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION]

Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]

Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,

desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

NOTE:

• Pleaseconsulttheretailstoreifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall

the projector on your own. This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people.

• Whenusingtheprojectorsuspendedfromaceiling,ensurethatpeopledonotstaybelowtheprojector.Intheeventthelamp

were to break, there is a risk that glass fragments may fall from the projector.

AUTO

�� This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT�

NOTE:

• TheDESKTOPREARandCEILINGREARwillnotbedetected.Pleaseselectmanually.

DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

TIP:

• CheckwhethertheautomaticDESKTOPFRONTisinstalledwithin±10degreesforoorinstallationandwhethertheCEILING

FRONTiswithin±10degreesforceilinginstallation.Selectmanuallywhentheprojectionscreenisinverted.

115

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for Screen [SCREEN]

[SCREEN TYPE]

Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

FREE �� The ratio of the liquid crystal panel is selected� Select this when projecting multi-screen and 17:9 screen

(2K)�

4:3 SCREEN �� For a screen with a 4:3 aspect ratio

16:9 SCREEN

�� For a screen with a 16:9 aspect ratio

16:10 SCREEN

�� For a screen with a 16:10 aspect ratio

NOTE:

•

Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 94)

[POSITION]

Adjustthescreenposition.Dependingonthemodelyouuseandthescreentype,thefunctionmaybecomeineffec-

tiveandtheadjustablerangemayvary.

Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

NOTE:Selecting[WHITEBOARD]reduceslampbrightness.

Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]

FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE �� Select one among four modes: AUTO, NORMAL, HIGH, and HIGH ALTITUDE�

AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at variable speed according to the detected temperature and

atmospheric pressure by the built-in sensor�

NORMAL: The built-in fans run at the appropriate speed based on the detection by the built-in temperature

sensor�

HIGH: The built-in fans run at high speed

HIGH ALTITUDE: The built-in fans run at high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes

approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher�

NOTE:

• Makesurethespeedissetto[HIGH]whenyouareusingthisdevicecontinuouslyforseveraldays.

•Set[FANMODE]to[AUTO]or[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersor

higher.

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[AUTO]or[HIGHALTITUDE]

can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the

projector.

•Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethe

lamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].

•Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuch

as the lamp.

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

116

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:

• When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.

[LIGHT MODE]

Wheneco-modeissetto[ON],theCO

emissions(calculatedfromthereductioninpowerconsumption)oftheprojec-

torcanbereduced.Theeco-modereducespowerconsumptionbymainlyloweringthebrightnessofthelamp.Asa

result,thelampreplacementtime(asaguide)*isextended.(→page37,136)

* Replacementtimenotguaranteed.

REF� LIGHT �� This can be set when the eco-mode is set to [OFF]� Adjust the lamp to match the brightness of each projector

when projecting a multi-screen display using multiple projectors�

ECOMODE OFF Thelampluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.

Theluminanceofthelampcanbesetusingthelampadjustment.

ON Thelampluminance(brightness)willbecomeapproximately70%andthelampreplacementtime

(estimated)*willbeextended.

* Thereplacementtimeisnotguaranteed.

REF.LIGHT Whenthe[MODE]forthe[PICTURE]inthe[ADJUST]is[STANDARD],andthe[ECOMODE]is

setto[OFF],[REF.LIGHT]isenabled.

Adjustthelamptomatchthebrightnessofeachprojectorwhenprojectingamulti-screendisplay

usingmultipleprojectors.

[REF. WHITE BALANCE]

Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.

Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.

Uniformityisalsoadjustedwhentheredness(R)andblueness(B)ofthewhitecolorinthescreen’shorizontal(left/

right)directionareuneven.

CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B

�� These adjust the picture’s white color�

BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B

�� These adjust the picture’s black color�

UNIFORMITY R �� The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture (increasing

towards the left edge) and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the

right edge)�

This is reversed when set to the – side�

UNIFORMITY B �� The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture (increasing

towards the left edge) and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the

right edge)�

This is reversed when set to the – side�

[STATICCONVERGENCE]

Thisfeaturesallowsyoutoadjustforcolordeviationinthepicture.

Thiscanbeadjustedinunitsof±1pixelinthehorizontaldirectionforHORIZONTALR,GandB,intheverticaldirec-

tionforVERTICALR,GandB.

117

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Reference Lens Memory Function [REF. LENS MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOM

andFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasa

reference to the current.

PROFILE �� Select a stored [PROFILE] number�

STORE �� Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference�

MOVE �� Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal�

RESET �� Reset selected [PROFILE] number [REF� LENS MEMORY] to the factory default settings�

LOAD BY SIGNAL �� When you switch signals the lens will shift to the lens shift, zoom, and focus values for the selected [PRO-

FILE] number�

If no adjusted values have been saved to [LENS MEMORY], the lens will apply [REF� LENS MEMORY]

adjusted values� Alternatively, if no adjusted values have been saved to [REF� LENS MEMORY], the unit will

return to factory default settings�

FORCED MUTE �� To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES]�

• ThelensunitsNP11FL,NP12ZL,NP13ZL,NP14ZL,andNP30ZLdonotsupportthisfunction.

NOTE:

• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for

[RESET]fromthemenu.

• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 56, 99)

[LENS CALIBRATION]

Theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthemountedlensiscalibrated.

Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

118

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTROL]

TOOLS

ADMINISTRATOR MODE

ThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.

(→page78)

—

NOTSAVESETTING

VALUES

Placingacheckmarkwillnotsaveyourprojectorsettings.

Clearthischeckboxtosaveyourprojectorsettings.

—

NEWPASSWORD/

CONFIRMPASS-

WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumeric

characters

119

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROGRAM TIMER

Thisoptionturnson/standbytheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsLIGHTmodeautomaticallyata

speciedtime.

NOTE:

• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 122)

 MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected.

The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about a month after the main power is turned off. If the main

powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorforamonthormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.

Setting a new program timer

1. OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usethe▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [PROGRAM LIST] screen will be displayed.

2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.

The [ (EDIT)] screen will be displayed.

3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.

ACTIVE �� Place a check mark to enable the program�

120

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DAY �� Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-

FRI]� To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�

TIME �� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�

FUNCTION �� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED

SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select ON or OFF for [ECO MODE] by setting [ADVANCED

SETTINGS]�

ADVANCED SETTINGS

�� Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�

REPEAT �� Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark�

4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This will complete the settings.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.

5. Select[ (BACK)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.

6. Select[EXIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.

NOTE:

• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.

• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.

• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe

cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.

• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.

• Whentwodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.

• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.

• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted

until the power off becomes possible.

• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris

enabled.

• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit

manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time.

121

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Activating the program timer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

The selection screen will be displayed.

2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Return to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.

NOTE:

• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe

[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.

• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-

GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.

Editing the programmed settings

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.

3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The programmed settings will be changed.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.

Changing the order of programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

The order of the programs will be changed.

Deleting the programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ (DELETE)].

3. PresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The program will be deleted.

This will complete deleting the program.

122

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.

NOTE: The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about a month after the main power is turned off. If the

main power is off for a month or more, the built-in clock will cease. If the built-in clock ceases, set the date and time again. The

built-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode. In order to activate the built-in clock continuously even when the projector

is not used, leave it in the standby state not plugging off the power cord.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS

�� Select your time zone�

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS �� Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�

INTERNET TIME SERVER: If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be syn-

chronized with an Internet time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�

UPDATE: Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not

available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS �� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�

[MOUSE]

ThisfunctionisforusingacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseviatheUSB-Aportonthisprojector.

BUTTON �� Select for using the mouse either by right or left hand�

SENSITIVITY �� Select the sensitivity of mouse among FAST, MIDDLE and LOW�

NOTE:ThissettingisnotguaranteedmotionofallcommerciallyavailableUSBmouses.

Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]

ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:

• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]

 Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presstheINPUTbuttononthemainbodyforabout10secondstocancelthe

[CONTROLPANELLOCK]setting.

TIP:

• Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.

• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.

Enabling Security [SECURITY]

ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.

Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page43)

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]

ThisfeaturesetsthecommunicationspeedforthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Makesuretosettheappropriate

speed for the device to connect.

NOTE:

• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

123

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]

YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROL

IDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogether

usingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER �� Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�

CONTROL ID ��Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting�

NOTE:

• When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupport

theCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

•PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControl

ID.

Assigning or Changing the Control ID

1. Turnontheprojector.

2. PresstheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.

If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [AC-

TIVE] will be displayed. If the projector cannot be operated with the current

remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive

projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following

procedure (Step 3).

3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheID

SETbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Example:

To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.

No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single

remote control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.

4. ReleasetheIDSETbutton.

The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.

NOTE:

•TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.

•Accidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrently

speciedIDwithbatteriesremoved.

124

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Turning On or Off Remote Sensor [REMOTE SENSOR]

Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.

Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT*.

NOTE:

• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice

connectedtotheprojectorisswitchedonwhenthishasbeensetto“HDBaseT”.

TIP:

• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof

the projector, change to other option.

125

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[NETWORK SETTINGS]

Important:

• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.

• WhenusingawiredLAN,connecttheEthernetcable(LANcable)totheLANportontheprojector.(→ page 152)

• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To set up the projector for a LAN connection:

Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].

TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.

Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpressthe

ENTERbutton.(→page126)

TorecallLANsettingsstoredintheprolenumber:

Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page126)

To connect a DHCP server:

Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingthe

DHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page126)

To receive lamp replacement time or error messages via e-mail:

Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].

Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page128)

126

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WIRED LAN

INTERFACE Select[LAN]forusingtheLANportforconnectingtothewired

LAN.Select[HDBaseT]forusingtheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport

forconnectingtothewiredLAN.Thecontrolfromtheconnected

devicewillbedisabledifnosignalissentandreceivedforthree

minutesiftheprojectorisconnectedtowiredLANthrutheHD-

BaseTIN/Ethernet.For refusingthis,setthestandbymodeto

[SLEEP]inadvance.

—

PROFILES

• ThesettingsforthewiredLANcanberecordedintheprojector

memory in two ways.

• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor

[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.

 Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.This

willstoreyoursettingsinmemory.

• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory:

 Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-

FILES]list.

 Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN

—

DHCP

PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstothe

projectorfromyourDHCPserver.

ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmask

numberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

—

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector

when[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numeric

characters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtothe

projectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numeric

characters

GATEWAY

Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector

when[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numeric

characters

AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyour

DNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserver

connected to the projector.

Upto12numeric

characters

DNSCONFIGURA-

TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnected

totheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.

Upto12numeric

characters

RECONNECT

Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhave

changed[PROFILES].

—

127

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROJECTORNAME

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-

meric characters and

symbols

DOMAIN

Setahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto16alphanumeric

characters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric

characters

128

5. Using On-Screen Menu

ALERT MAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerror

messagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.

Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�

Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�

Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:

Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife.

Please replace the lamp.

Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.

[Information]

ProjectorName:xxxxx

LampHoursUsed:xxxxx[H]

—

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto16alphanumeric

characters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric

characters

SENDER'SAD-

DRESS

Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-

meric characters and

symbols

SMTPSERVER

NAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric

characters

RECIPIENT'SAD-

DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-

meric characters and

symbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.

NOTE:

• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceivean

Alert mail. Should this happen, checkif the Recipient’s Address is

correctly set.

• Unless any one of the[SENDER'S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER'S

NAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]is

not available.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting

[TESTMAIL].

—

129

5. Using On-Screen Menu

NETWORKSERVICE

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumeric

characters

PJLink

This option allows you to set a password when you use the

PJLinkfeature.

NOTE:

• Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,

consult with your dealer.

• WhatisPJLink?

 PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors

of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by

JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-

tion(JBMIA)in2005.

 TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.

• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom

the menu.

Upto32alphanumeric

characters

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhen

connectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrol

system.

TIP:

WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinx

control system will recognize the device and download the appropriate

DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device

Discovery�

Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX

Device Discovery�

—

CRESTRON

ROOMVIEW:Turnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfrom

yourPC.

CRESTRON CONTROL: Turn on or off when controlling the

projector from your controller.

• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-

RONSERVER.

• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

Upto12numeric

characters

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.ON

willenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.OFFwilldisable

toconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

—

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.

Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

130

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE OPTIONS]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]

ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfor

noiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF �� The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�

NORMAL �� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�

FINE �� Select this option if ﬁne adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected�

TIP:

• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].

• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.

[AUDIO SELECT]

ThisselectstheaudioinputoftheHDMI1INterminal,HDMI2INterminal,DisplayPortinputterminalandHDBaseT

IN/Ethernetport.

Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT INPUT SELECT]

Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST �� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�

AUTO �� Searches for an active source in order of HDMI1 → HDMI2 → DisplayPort → COMPUTER → HDBaseT and

displays the ﬁrst found source�

HDMI1 �� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�

HDMI2 �� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�

DisplayPort �� Displays the digital source from the DisplayPort every time the projector is turned on�

COMPUTER �� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned on�

HDBaseT �� Project the HDBaseT signal�

[SEAMLESS SWITCHING]

Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldtoswitchtothenewimagewithout

abreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]

Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].

NOTE:

• Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground

is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.

131

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[HDBaseT OUT SELECT]

SelectsignaltooutputfromtheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportontheprojector.Whentwoimagesareprojectedsimul-

taneously(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE),theimageforthemainscreenisoutput.

AUTO �� Output the input signal� When [PIP] has been set, the input signal for the main screen is output�

HDMI1 �� Output the input signal thru the HDMI1 input terminal�

HDMI2 �� Output the input signal thru the HDMI2 input terminal�

DisplayPort �� Output the input signal thru the DisplayPort IN terminal�

HDBaseT �� Output the input signal thru the HDBaseT IN/Ethernet port�

NOTE:

• SignalthrutheCOMPUTERinputterminalcannotbeoutput.Inthestate[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]hasbeensetand

[AUTO]hasbeensetforthisfunction,moreover,theinputterminalforthemainscreenistheCOMPUTERandtheinputterminal

forthesubscreenisoneamongtheHDMI1IN,HDMI2IN,DisplayPortINterminals,orHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport,thesignalfrom

the sub screen will be output.

• Ifthesetinputterminalsformainandsubscreenfor[PIP]and[PICTUREBYPICTURE]aredifferedfromtheselectedinput

terminals, any image will be output.

• 4K60pand4K50psignalscannotbeoutput.

[EDIDVERSION]

SwitchtheEDIDversionfortheHDMI1INandHDMI2INterminals.

MODE1 �� Supports general signal

MODE2

�� Supports 4K signal

Select this mode for displaying 4K image using the device supporting 4K

NOTE:

Ifimageandsoundcannotbeoutputin[MODE2],switchto[MODE1].

[HDCPVERSION]

SwitchtheHDCPversionfortheHDMI1IN,HDMI2INandHDBaseTIN/Ethernetterminals.

HDCP2�2 �� Automatically switch the mode HDCP2�2 and HDCP1�4

HDCP1�4 �� Forcedly perform transmission with HDCP1�4

NOTE:

• IfimageandsoundcannotbeoutputfromthemonitorconnectedwiththeHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetport,switchtheHDCPversion

toHDCP1.4.

132

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[POWER OPTIONS]

[STANDBY MODE]

Selectthestandbymode:

NORMAL �� Automatically transit the standby state and control consumption power based on the projector setting and

the state of the connected device� (→ page 183)

SLEEP

�� Maintain the state of sleep� Consumption power becomes higher than the setting of NORMAL� Select this

mode in the following cases:

• ForusingtheHDBaseTIN/EthernetandHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportsconstantly.

• ForusingtheUSB-Aportconstantly.

[EXAMPLE]

- For connecting plural numbers of projector in a daisy chain� (→ page 149)

- For connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (→ page 148)

TIP:

• The[STANDBYMODE]settingisnotchangedby[RESET].

• ConsumptionpowerintheSTANDBYmodeisexcludedfromthecalculationforcarbonsaving.

Enabling Direct Power On [DIRECT POWER ON]

Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.Thiseliminatesthe

needtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

Turning On the Projector by Detecting Input Signal [AUTO POWER ON SELECT]

Underthestateofstandbyorsleep,theprojectorautomaticallydetectsandprojectssynchronizingsignalinputfrom

theselectedterminalsamongComputer,HDMI1/2,DisplayPort,andHDBaseTbythisfunction.

OFF �� AUTO POWER ON SELECT function becomes inactive�

HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT*

�� When the projector detects the computer signal input from the selected terminal, automatically it will be

turned ON and will project the computer screen�

NOTE:

• IfyouwanttoactivatethisAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector,interruptsignalfrominput

terminals or pull out the computer cable from the projector and wait for over 3 seconds and then input signal from the selected

terminal.Incasecomputersignaliscontinuouslyinputtotheprojector,howevertheprojectoristurnedOFFandisinthetransition

toSLEEPmode,itwillkeepSLEEPmodeandwillnotbeturnedONautomatically.Inaddition,ifsignalfromHDMI1/2,DisplayPort

orHDBaseTiscontinuouslyinputtotheprojector,theprojectormaybeturnedONagainautomaticallybasedonthesettingof

externaldeviceseveniftheprojectoristurnedOFFandintheconditionofSLEEPmode.

• Thisfunctionisnotactivatedeitherbycomponentsignalinputfromthecomputerscreeninputterminalorcomputersignalas

SynconGreenandCompositeSync.

133

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]

Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,

0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]

1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.

2. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.

3. TheremainingtimestartscountingdownanditisdisplayedatthebottomoftheOn-ScreenMenu.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:

• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.

• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3

MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

134

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]

TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)except

thefollowing:

[CURRENT SIGNAL]

Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.

Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-

PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALL DATA]

Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.

All items can be reset EXCEPT [ENTRY LIST], [LANGUAGE], [BACKGROUND], [FILTER MESSAGE], [EDGE

BLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[STATIC

CONVERGENCE],[REF.LENSMEMORY],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],

[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],

[EDIDVERSION],[HDCPVERSION],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],

[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN].

Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]

Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalsincludingthe[ENTRYLIST]tothefactorypresetexcept

[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION], [REF. WHITE BALANCE], [STATIC CONVERGENCE], [REF. LENS MEMORY],

[ADMINISTRATORMODE], [CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEAND

TIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[EDIDVERSION],[HDCPVERSION],[LAMP

LIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN].

Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]

Resetsthelamp clockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenufora conrmation.Select[YES]and

presstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:

• Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

• Performing[CLEARLAMPHOURS]willreturnthe[REF.LIGHT]in[LIGHTMODE]toitsdefaultadjustments.Whentheprojector

isusedformulti-screenprojection,use[REF.LIGHT]toadjustthebrightnessagain.

135

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Clearing the Filter Usage Hours [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]

Resetsthelterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]and

presstheENTERbutton.

The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneed

toclearthelterusagehour.

NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

136

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]

Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisas

follows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LAMPLIFEREMAINING](%)*

[LAMPHOURSUSED](H)

[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)

[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.

 Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFE

REMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.

• Themessagetotheeffectthatthelamportheltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhenthe

projectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.

 Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.

NP42LPLamplife(H) PA803U PA723U PA653U PA853W PA703W PA903W

ECOmodeOFF 3000 3500 4000 3000 4000 3000

ECOmode 5000

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

 Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-

culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page37)

137

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTION

HORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY

SYNCTYPE SYNC POLARITY

SCANTYPE SOURCE NAME

ENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE BITDEPTH

VIDEOLEVEL SAMPLING FREQUENCY

3DFORMAT

[SOURCE(3)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTION

HORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY

SYNCTYPE SYNC POLARITY

SCANTYPE SOURCE NAME

ENTRYNO.

138

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(4)]

SIGNALTYPE BITDEPTH

VIDEOLEVEL SAMPLING FREQUENCY

3DFORMAT

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK

GATEWAY MACADDRESS

[VERSION]

FIRMWARE DATA

FIRMWARE2

139

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[OTHERS]

DATETIME PROJECTORNAME

MODELNO. SERIAL NUMBER

LENSID

[CONDITIONS]

INTAKETEMPERATURE EXHAUSTTEMPERATURE

ATMOSPHERICPRESSURE INSTALLATIONPOSITION

X-AXIS Y-AXIS

Z-AXIS

AbouttheX-AXIS,Y-AXISandZ-AXISCONDITIONS

* ArrowdirectionoftheZ-AXISinthegurerepresentsthetopoftheprojector.

X-AXIS �� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100

degrees to the horizontal in the X-axis direction�

X-AXIS value of

the projector

Horizontal plane

X-axis

Gravity direction

Y-AXIS �� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100

degrees to the horizontal in the Y-axis direction�

Y-AXIS value of

the projector

Horizontal plane

Y-axis

Gravity direction

140

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Z-AXIS �� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100

degrees to the vertical in the Z-axis direction�

Z-AXIS value of

the projector

Horizontal

plane Z-axis

Gravity direction

[HDBaseT]

SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODE

LINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS

141

❶ Mounting a lens (sold separately)

Eightseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedwiththisprojector.ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP13ZL(2x

zoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.

WARNING:

(1)Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostop,(2)disconnectthepowercordandwaitfortheunitto

coolbeforemountingorremovingthelens.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

Important:

• Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.

• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeing

moved, damaging the lens and the lens shift mechanism.

• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failure

to do so may prevent the lens from being mounted or dismounted because of narrow space between the projector and the lens.

• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.

• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.

• Performtheseoperationsonaatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.

• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfrom

getting inside.

Mounting the lens

1. Removethedustcapfromtheprojector.

2. Removethelenscaponthebackofthelens.

NOTE:

• Makesuretoremovethelenscapattheunitbackside.Ifthelensunit

with the lens cap remaining on is installed on the projector, it may cause

of malfunction.

3. Aligntheprotrusiononthelenswiththeguidingnotchon

the projector lens hole and insert the lens.

NP11FL/NP30ZL/NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL

Each protrusion is marked in yellow.

NP40ZL/NP41ZL/NP43ZL

The arrow mark in the label attached to the lens shows the

position of protrusion.

Insert the lens slowly all the way in.

Guiding notch

Protrusion

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

142

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

4. Turnthelensclockwise.

Turn until a click is heard.

The lens is now fastened onto the projector.

TIP:Mountingthelenstheftpreventionscrew

Fastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothe

bottom of the projector so that the lens cannot be removed easily.

Removing the lens

Preparations:

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press and hold the SHIFT/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds.

The lens position will be moved to the home position.

3. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.

4. Wait until the projector cabinet is cool enough to handle.

Ifthelenstheftpreventionscrewhasbeenseton,removeitrst.

1. While pressing the lens release button at the bottom of

lensmountingsectionontheprojector’sfrontpanelfully

in,turnthelenscounterclockwise.

The lens comes off.

NOTE:

• Checkthefollowingareasifthelensunitcannotberemovedeven

when the lens release button is pressed.

1. The lens release button may be locked sometimes. In that case,

turn the lens fully to the right. The lens release button lock will

be released.

2. Slowly pull the lens off the projector.

• After removing the lens, mount the lens caps (front and

back) included with the lens before storing the lens.

• Ifnolensisgoingtobemountedontheprojector,mount

the dust cap included with the projector.

Make sure the direction to mount the dust cap to face the

distinguish mark (△) on the cap upward.

143

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

❷ Making Connections

Acomputercable,HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.

Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connectthecomputercabletothemonitoroutterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandthecomputer

video input terminal on the projector. Please use a computer cable attached with a ferrite core.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.

Inputconnector

INPUTbuttonontheprojector

cabinet

Buttonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN

4:COMPUTER

4/COMPUTER

COMPUTER IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

Stereo mini-plug audio cable (not supplied)

NOTE:

• Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthecomputeras

the name, position and direction of the terminal may

differ depending on the computer.

Computer cable (sold commercially)

144

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputconnectorandtheprojector’s

HDMI1orHDMI2inputconnector.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputconnectorand

theprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.

Inputconnector

INPUTbuttonontheprojector

cabinet

Buttonontheremotecontrol

HDMI1IN 1:HDMI1 1/HDMI1

HDMI2IN 2:HDMI2 2/HDMI2

DisplayPortIN

3:DisplayPort

3/DisplayPort

Cautions when connecting an HDMI cable

• UseacertiedHighSpeedHDMI

CableorHighSpeedHDMI

CablewithEthernet.

Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable

• UseacertiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sconnector,thenpullthecableout.

• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortinputterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,

power will not be supplied to the computer.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,

insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,useaconverter(commer-

ciallyavailable).

HDMI 1 IN

HDMI 2 IN

DisplayPort IN

HDMI cable (not supplied)

DisplayPort cable (not supplied)

145

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal

• Whenthe computerhasa DVI output connector,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthe

computertotheprojector’sHDMI1orHDMI2inputconnector(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).Also,con-

nectthecomputer’saudiooutputtotheprojector’saudioinputconnector.Inthiscase,switchtheHDMI1orHDMI2

settingaton-screenmenu’saudioselectionontheprojectorto[COMPUTER].(→page130)

 Toconnectthecomputer’sDVIoutputconnectortotheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector,useacommercially

available converter.

HDMI 1 IN

HDMI 2 IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal

• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnecting.

• Lowerthecomputer’svolumesettingbeforeconnectinganaudiocabletotheheadphonesconnector.Whenusingwithacomputer

connected to the projector, adjust the volume of both the projector and computer to set the appropriate volume level.

• Ifthecomputerhasamini-jacktypeaudiooutputconnector,werecommendconnectingtheaudiocabletothatconnector.

• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.

• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-

dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.

• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.

• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC.

 Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,

restartyourPC.

• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormay

result in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.

• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojectorisrunning.Ifthesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthen

reconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• TheCOMPUTERvideoinputconnectorssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.

• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer.

 ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→

DisplayPortconvertercable.

146

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Connecting Component Input

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.

Inputconnector

INPUTbuttonontheprojector

cabinet

Buttonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN

4:COMPUTER

4/COMPUTER

NOTE:

• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalare

automaticallydistinguished and switched. Ifthe signals cannotbe distinguished, select [COMPONENT] under [ADJUST] →

[VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDconnector,usethesoldseparatelyDconnectorconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

COMPUTER IN

15-pin - to - RCA (female) × 3 cable

adapter (ADP-CV1E)

Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not

supplied)

Component video RCA × 3 cable

(not supplied)

Blu-ray player

Audio Equipment

147

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Connecting HDMI Input

YoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMI1INor

HDMI2INconnectorofyourprojector.

Inputconnector

INPUTbuttonontheprojector

cabinet

Buttonontheremotecontrol

HDMI1IN 1:HDMI1 1/HDMI1

HDMI2IN 2:HDMI2 2/HDMI2

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:

Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.

This will provide improved image contrast and more detailed dark areas.

Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMI1INorHDMI2INconnectoroftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideo

levelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→

[VIDEO]→[VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

• IftheHDMIinput’ssoundisnotoutput,checkif[HDMI1]and[HDMI2]areset[HDMI1]and[HDMI2]correctlythe

on-screenmenu[SETUP]→[SOURCEOPTIONS]→[AUDIOSELECT].(→page130)

HDMI 1 IN

HDMI 2 IN

AUDIO OUT

Audio cable (not supplied)

HDMI cable (not supplied)

Use High Speed HDMI

Cable.

148

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)

UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseT

transmission device sold commercially.

TheHDBaseTIN/EthernetportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,control

signalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).

• Refertotheowner’smanualaccompaniedwithyourHDBaseTtransmissionforconnectingwithyourexternalde-

vices.

Connection example

RS-232CLAN

AUDIO IN HDMI IN

Wired-Remote

DC IN

HDBaseT

COMPUTER IN

HDBaseT IN/Ethernet

Computer (for control use)

Computer (for output use)

Example of a transmission device

Our company’s remote

control (RD-465E)

HDMI output video device

NOTE:

• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).

• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)

• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe

degraded as a result.

• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.

149

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Connecting several projectors

ItenablestoprojectHDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseTimageonseveralprojectorsconnectingtheHDBaseTIN/Ethernet

portandtheHDBaseTOUT/EthernetportbyLANcable.Theprojectorssupportsamebrightnessandresolutioncan

beconnecteduptofourunits,

HDBaseT OUT/Ethernet

HDBaseT IN/Ethernet

• ThesignalfromtheCOMPUTERINterminalisnotoutputfromtheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportofthisprojector.

• Projectorsofwhichbrightnessandresolutionaredifferent,thesecannotbeconnectedeveniftheseareinsame

series.Atthesametime,thisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkcorrectlyintheconnectionwithanotherdevice

as a monitor.

• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnected

beforeinputtingvideosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIoutputterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeater

functions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIoutputterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedby

the resolution supported by the connected device.

• ConnectinganddisconnectinganHDMIcableorselectinganotherinputsourceonthesecondandsubsequent

projectorswilldisabletheHDMIrepeaterfunction.

Master projector

Other projector

150

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Portrait projection (vertical orientation)

Portraitscreensfromacomputercanbeprojectedbyinstallingtheprojec-

torinaverticalorientation.Angletodisplayallthescreenssuchasthe

on-screenmenucanbechangedbythemenu[SETUP]→[MENU(2)]

→[MENUANGLE].

Precautions during installation

• Pleasedonotinstalltheprojectorinaverticalorientationontopoftheoorortableonitsown.Theintakevent

maybeobstructed,resultingintheprojectorgettingwarmandthepossibilityofreandmalfunctionoccurring.

• Forverticalinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakevent(lter)facingdownwards.Astandforsupporting

theprojectorneedstobemadeforthispurpose.Inthiscase,thestandmustbedesignedsuchthatthecenter

ofgravityoftheprojectorislocatedwellwithinthelegsofthestand.Ifnot,theprojectormayfalloverandresult

ininjury,damageandmalfunction.

Design and manufacturing conditions for the stand

Pleaseengageaninstallationserviceproviderforthedesignandmanufactureofthecustomizedstandtobeusedfor

portraitprojection.Pleaseensurethatthefollowingarecompliedwithwhendesigningthestand.

1. Maintainanopeningofatleast315×150mmsoasnottoobstructtheintakevent/lteroftheprojector.

2. Maintainadistanceofatleast130mmbetweentheprojectorintakeventandtheoor(fortheopeningofthelter

cover).

3. Usethefourscrewholesatthebackoftheprojectortosecureittothestand.

 Screwholecenterdimension:200×250mm

 Screwholedimensionontheprojector:M4withamaximumdepthof8mm.

* Pleasedesignthestandsuchthattherearlegsatthebackoftheprojectordonotcontactthestand.Thefront

legscanbeturnedandremoved.

4. Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsinfourlocations)

5. Pleasedesignthestandsuchthatitdoesnottoppleovereasily.

151

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Reference drawings

* Thedrawingshowingthedimensionalrequirementsisnotanactualstanddesigndrawing.

[Side View] [Front View]

Screw holes for 4 -

M4 use

Tilt foot (remove)

130 or greater

200

Filter cover (when opened)

Horizontal adjuster

[Bottom View]

Filter cover

315 or greater

Rear foot

152

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Connecting to a Wired LAN

TheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.

TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORK

SETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page126).

Example of LAN connection

ExampleofwiredLANconnection

LAN

Server

Hub

LAN cable (not supplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

153

7. Maintenance

Thissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthelters,thelens,thecabinet,

andtoreplacethelampandthelters.

❶ Cleaning the Filters

Thelterattheintakeventkeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojector.Ifthelterisdirtyorclogged,your

projector may overheat.

WARNING

• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelters,etc.Doingsomay

resultinres.

NOTE:Themessageforltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageis

displayed,cleanthelters.Thetimetocleantheltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.(→ page 112)

To cancel the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.

Tocleanthelter,detachthelterunitandtheltercover.

CAUTION

• Beforecleaningthelters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.

Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.

1. Press down two buttons and then pull the filter cover

towards you to open it.

Filter cover Button

2. Pickthecenterofthefilterunitforpullingitout.

Filter unit

154

7. Maintenance

3. Vacuumdustonthefrontandbackfacesofthefilterunit.

• Getridofdustinthefilter.

• Gentlygetridofdustonthefiltercoverandintheaccordion

pleats of the filter.

NOTE:

• Wheneveryouvacuumthelter,usethesoftbrushattachmentto

vacuum. This is to avoid damage to the ﬁlter.

• Donotwashthelterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinlterclog-

ging.

Filter unitFilter cover

4. Mountthefilterunitbackontotheprojectorcabinet.

Insert the filter unit onto the projector aligning the two protru-

sions on each top and bottom of the filter unit to the grooves

on the projector cabinet.

Protrusion

Groove

5. Closethefiltercover.

Keep to push the filter cover frame around the buttons until

a “click” sound is heard. The filter cover will be secured in

position.

Button

6. Clearthefilterusagehours.

Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the

projector.

From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS].

(→ page 135)

The interval time to clean the filters is set to [OFF] at time of

shipment. When using the projector as it is, you do not clear

the filter usage

155

7. Maintenance

❷ Cleaning the Lens

• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.

• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.

• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.

WARNING

• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelens,etc.Doingsomay

resultinres.

❸ Cleaning the Cabinet

Turnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

 Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuum

cleaner into the slits of the cabinet.

Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.

• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourngersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproduct

in prolonged contact with it. Otherwise the surface ﬁnish will be deteriorated or the coating may be stripped off.

156

7. Maintenance

❹ Replacing the Lamp

Whenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatoronthecabinetwillblinkinorangeandthemessage“THE

LAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMP.USETHESPECIFIED

LAMPFORSAFETYANDPERFORMANCE.”willappear(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,replacethe

lamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformanceassoonaspossible.Afterreplacingthelamp,besuretoclear

the lamp hour meter. (→page134)

CAUTION

• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroff

andthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.

• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.

• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexceptonelampcoverscrewandtwolamphousingscrews.Youcouldreceive

anelectricshock.

• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.

 Keepngerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingngerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcause

anunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.

• ThebarindicatorastheLAMPLIFEREMAININGshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.

 Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0%,theLAMPLIFEREMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100

Hoursasthegraceperiodforreplacinglampandstartscountingdown.Inthegraceperiod,theLAMPindicator

willblinkinorange.

 Whenitreaches0hours,theLAMPindicatorwillstartblinkinginred.

 Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesof

glassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishap-

pens,contactyourNECdealerforlampreplacement.

*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:

• foroneminuteaftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon

• whenthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheSTANDBYbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed

To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.

Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:

• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

• Replacementlamp:

NP42LP

Flow of Replacing the Lamp

Step 1. Replacethelamp

Step 2. Clearthelampusagehours(→page134, 135)

157

7. Maintenance

To replace the lamp:

1. Removethelampcover.

(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw

• Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.

(2) Pull the bottom of the lamp cover towards you and remove it.

2. Removethelamphousing.

(1) Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condi-

tion.

• Thetwoscrewsarenotremovable.

• Thereisaninterlockonthiscasetopreventtheriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempttocircumventthis

interlock.

(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.

CAUTION:

Makesurethatthelamphousingiscoolenoughtobeforeremovingit.

Interlock

158

7. Maintenance

3. Installanewlamphousing.

(1) Insert a new lamp housing gently.

(2) Secure it in place with the two screws.

• Besuretotightenthescrews.

4. Reattachthelampcover.

(1) Insert the top edge of the lamp cover into the groove in the projector and close the lamp cover.

(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.

• Besuretotightenthescrew.

This completes the lamp replacement.

Go on to clear the lamp usage hours.

159

7. Maintenance

To clear the lamp usage hours:

1. Place the projector where you use it.

2. Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.

3. Clearthelampusagehours.

From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours. (→ page 134)

160

7. Maintenance

❺ Replacing the filters

Replacethelterevery10000usedhours.

Usabletimeofthelterisvariesdependsontheprojectorinstallationcircumstances.Ifyourprojectorisinstalledin

dustycircumstance,recommendtoreplacethelterearlierthan10000hours.

• Thereplacementlter,NP06FT,isavailableatourdealers.

NOTE:

• DONOTTOUCHTHEFILTERUNITimmediatelyaftertheprojectorhasbeenused.Turntheprojectoroffandthendisconnectthe

power cord and leave the projector cooled down enough.

• Timeforreplacingthelterisvarydependsontheoperationcircumstances.

Toreplacethelters:

NOTE:

• Beforereplacingthelters,wipeoffdustanddirtfromtheprojectorcabinet.

• Theprojectorisprecisionequipment.Keepoutdustanddirtduringlterreplacement.

• Donotwashthelterswithsoapandwater.Soapandwaterwilldamagetheltermembrane.

• Putltersintoplace.Incorrectattachmentofaltermaycausedustanddirttogetintotheinsideoftheprojector.

1. Press down two buttons and then pull the filter cover

towards you to open it.

Filter cover Button

2. Pickthecenterofthefilterunitforpullingitout.

Filter unit

3. Removedustfromthefiltercover.

Clean both outside and inside.

4. Attach a new filter into the filter unit.

Filter cover

161

7. Maintenance

5. Mountthefilterunitbackontotheprojectorcabinet.

Insert the filter unit onto the projector aligning the two protru-

sions on each top and bottom of the filter unit to the groove

on the projector cabinet.

Protrusion

Groove

6. Closethefiltercover.

Keep to push the filter cover frame around the buttons until

a “click” sound is heard. The filter cover will be secured in

position.

Button

Thiscompletesthelterreplacement.

Goontoclearthelterhours.

Toclearthelterhours:

1. Place the projector where you use it.

2. Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.

3. Clearthefilterhours.

From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS] and reset the filter usage hours. (→ page 135)

162

8. Appendix

❶ Throw distance and screen size

Eightseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedonthisprojector.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusea

lenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,

seepage141.

Lens types and throw distance

WUXGAType

(Unit:m)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - -

0.7-0.9 0.9-1.9 - - - -

0.7 - 1.0-1.3 1.2-2.5 - - - -

0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.6-3.1 - 0.8-1.2 1.4-3.2 3.3-6.4

60 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.5-1.9 1.9-3.8 3.7-6.0 1.0-1.4 1.7-3.9 3.9-7.7

80 1.4 1.4-1.8 2.0-2.6 2.5-5.1 5.0-8.0 1.4-1.9 2.2-5.2 5.2-10.2

100 1.7 1.7-2.2 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.3 6.3-10.1 1.7-2.4 2.8-6.5 6.4-12.8

120 2.1 2.0-2.7 3.0-3.9 3.8-7.6 7.5-12.1 2.0-2.9 3.4-7.8 7.7-15.3

150 2.6 2.6-3.4 3.8-4.9 4.8-9.5 9.4-15.2 2.6-3.6 4.2-9.8 9.6-19.1

200 - 3.4-4.5 5.1-6.6 6.4-12.7 12.6-20.3 3.4-4.8 5.7-13.0 12.7-25.4

240 - 4.1-5.4 6.1-7.9 7.6-15.3 15.2-24.4 4.1-5.8 6.8-15.6 15.3-30.5

300 - 5.2-6.8 7.6-9.9 9.6-19.1 19.0-30.5 5.2-7.3 8.5-19.6 19.1-38.1

400 - 6.9-9.0 10.2-13.2 12.8-25.5 25.4-40.7 6.9-9.7 11.4-26.1 25.4-50.8

500 - 8.7-11.3 12.7-16.5 16.0-31.9 31.8-50.9 8.6-12.1 14.2-32.6 31.7-63.4

(Unit:inches)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - - 28-37 36-74 - - - -

26 - 38-50 48-99 - - - -

33 33-43 48-64 61-124 - 33-46 54-127 129-254

60 40 40-52 59-77 74-149 146-236 40-56 66-153 154-303

80 53 53-70 79-103 99-200 196-317 53-75 88-204 204-403

100 67 67-88 99-129 124-250 246-397 67-94 110-256 254-503

120 81 81-106 119-155 149-300 296-477 81-113 133-307 303-602

150 101 101-132 149-194 187-376 372-598 101-142 166-384 378-752

200 - 135-177 199-259 250-502 497-799 135-190 223-513 502-1001

240 - 163-213 239-312 301-602 598-959 163-229 267-616 601-1201

300 - 204-267 300-390 377-754 748-1200 204-286 335-770 750-1500

400 - 272-356 400-521 503-1005 1000-1602 272-382 447-1028 999-1998

500 - 341-445 501-651 629-1257 1251-2004 340-478 559-1285 1247-2497

TIP

Calculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensize

NP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:26"/0.7m(min.)to101"/2.6m(max.)

NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.0:33"/0.8m(min.)to445"/11.3m(max.)

NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.5:28"/0.7m(min.)to651"/16.5m(max.)

NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:36"/0.9m(min.)to1257"/31.9m(max.)

NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×2.9toH×4.7:146"/3.7m(min.)to2004"/50.9m(max.)

NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:33"/0.8m(min.)to478"/12.1m(max.)

NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.0:54"/1.4m(min.)to1285"/32.6m(max.)

NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×5.9:129"/3.3m(min.)to2497"/63.4m(max.)

“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.

*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.

Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:

Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=127"/323.1cm.

Thethrowdistanceis127"/323.1cm×1.5to127"/323.1cm×3.0=191"/484.7cmto381"/969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

163

8. Appendix

WXGAType

(Unit:m)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - - 0.7-1.0 0.9-1.9 - - - -

0.7 - 1.0-1.3 1.2-2.5 - - - -

0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.6-3.2 - 0.8-1.2 1.4-3.2 3.3-6.5

60 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.5-2.0 1.9-3.8 3.7-6.0 1.0-1.4 1.7-3.9 3.9-7.7

80 1.4 1.4-1.8 2.0-2.6 2.5-5.1 5.0-8.1 1.4-1.9 2.2-5.2 5.2-10.3

100 1.7 1.7-2.2 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.4 6.3-10.1 1.7-2.4 2.8-6.5 6.5-12.8

120 2.1 2.0-2.7 3.0-4.0 3.8-7.7 7.6-12.2 2.1-2.9 3.4-7.8 7.7-15.4

150 2.6 2.6-3.4 3.8-5.0 4.8-9.6 9.5-15.3 2.6-3.6 4.3-9.8 9.6-19.2

200 - 3.4-4.5 5.1-6.6 6.4-12.8 12.7-20.4 3.4-4.9 5.7-13.1 12.8-25.5

240 - 4.1-5.4 6.1-8.0 7.7-15.4 15.3-24.5 4.1-5.8 6.8-15.7 15.3-30.6

300 - 5.2-6.8 7.7-10.0 9.6-19.2 19.1-30.7 5.2-7.3 8.6-19.6 19.1-38.2

400 - 6.9-9.0 10.2-13.3 12.8-25.7 25.5-40.9 6.9-9.7 11.4-26.2 25.5-51.0

500 - 8.7-11.3 12.8-16.7 16.0-32.1 31.9-51.2 8.7-12.2 14.3-32.8 31.8-63.7

(Unit:inches)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - - 29-38 36-74 - - - -

26 - 39-51 49-99 - - - -

33 33-43 49-64 61-125 - 33-47 55-128 130-255

60 40 40-52 59-77 74-150 147-238 40-56 66-153 155-305

80 53 53-70 79-103 99-201 197-318 53-75 88-205 205-405

100 67 67-88 99-130 125-251 248-399 67-95 111-257 255-505

120 81 81-106 120-156 150-302 298-480 81-114 134-308 304-605

150 101 101-132 150-195 188-378 374-601 101-143 167-386 379-755

200 - 135-177 201-261 252-504 500-803 136-191 224-515 504-1005

240 - 163-213 241-314 302-606 601-965 163-230 269-618 604-1205

300 - 204-267 302-393 378-757 752-1207 204-287 337-773 753-1506

400 - 272-356 403-524 505-1011 1005-1611 273-384 449-1031 1003-2006

500 - 341-445 504-656 632-1264 1257-2015 342-480 562-1289 1252-2507

TIP

Calculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensize

NP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:26"/0.7m(min.)to102"/2.6m(max.)

NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.0:33"/0.8m(min.)to445"/11.3m(max.)

NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.5:29"/0.7m(min.)to656"/16.7m(max.)

NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:36"/0.9m(min.)to1264"/32.1m(max.)

NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×2.9toH×4.7:147"/3.7m(min.)to2015"/51.2m(max.)

NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:33"/0.8m(min.)to480"/12.2m(max.)

NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.0:55"/1.4m(min.)to1289"/32.8m(max.)

NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×6.0:130"/3.3m(min.)to2507"/63.7m(max.)

“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.

*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.

Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:

Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=127"/323.1cm.

Thethrowdistanceis127"/323.1cm×1.5to127"/323.1cm×3.0=191"/484.7cmto381"/969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

164

8. Appendix

XGAType

(Unit:m)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - - 0.7-0.9 0.9-1.8 - - - -

0.6 - 0.9-1.2 1.2-2.4 - - - -

0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.5-3.0 - 0.8-1.1 1.3-3.1 3.2-6.2

60 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.4-1.9 1.8-3.7 3.6-5.8 1.0-1.4 1.6-3.7 3.8-7.4

80 1.3 1.3-1.7 1.9-2.5 2.4-4.9 4.8-7.8 1.3-1.8 2.2-5.0 5.0-9.9

100 1.6 1.6-2.1 2.4-3.2 3.0-6.1 6.0-9.7 1.6-2.3 2.7-6.3 6.2-12.3

120 2.0 2.0-2.6 2.9-3.8 3.7-7.4 7.3-11.7 2.0-2.8 3.3-7.5 7.4-14.8

150 2.5 2.5-3.2 3.7-4.8 4.6-9.2 9.1-14.7 2.5-3.5 4.1-9.4 9.3-18.4

160 2.7

200 - 3.3-4.3 4.9-6.4 6.1-12.3 12.2-19.6 3.3-4.7 5.5-12.5 12.3-24.5

240 - 4.0-5.2 5.9-7.7 7.4-14.8 14.7-23.6 4.0-5.6 6.6-15.1 14.7-29.4

300 - 5.0-6.5 7.4-9.6 9.2-18.5 18.4-29.5 5.0-7.0 8.2-18.8 18.4-36.7

400 - 6.7-8.7 9.8-12.8 12.3-24.7 24.5-39.3 6.7-9.4 11.0-25.1 24.5-48.9

500 - 8.4-10.9 12.3-16.0 15.4-30.9 30.7-49.2 8.3-11.7 13.7-31.4 30.5-61.1

(Unit:inches)

Screensize

(inches)

Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

30 - - 27-36 35-71 - - - -

26 - 37-49 47-95 - - - -

33 31-42 47-61 59-120 - 31-45 52-122 125-245

60 40 38-50 56-74 71-144 141-228 38-54 63-147 149-293

80 53 51-67 76-99 96-193 189-306 51-72 85-197 197-389

100 67 65-85 95-125 120-242 238-384 64-91 107-246 245-485

120 81 78-102 115-150 144-290 286-461 78-109 128-296 292-581

150 101 98-128 144-188 181-363 359-578 97-137 161-370 364-725

160 105

200 - 131-171 193-251 242-485 481-772 130-183 215-494 484-965

240 - 157-205 231-301 291-582 578-927 157-220 258-593 580-1157

300 - 197-257 290-377 364-728 723-1160 196-276 323-742 723-1446

400 - 263-343 387-503 486-972 966-1549 262-368 432-989 963-1926

500 - 329-430 484-630 608-1215 1209-1937 328-461 540-1237 1202-2407

TIP

Calculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensize

NP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:25"/0.6m(min.)to105"/2.7m(max.)

NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:31"/0.8m(min.)to430"/10.9m(max.)

NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.6:27"/0.7m(min.)to484"/16.0m(max.)

NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:35"/0.9m(min.)to1215"/30.9m(max.)

NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×4.8:141"/3.6m(min.)to1937"/49.2m(max.)

NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:31"/0.8m(min.)to461"/11.7m(max.)

NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.1:52"/1.3m(min.)to1237"/31.4m(max.)

NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.1toH×6.1:125"/3.2m(min.)to2407"/61.1m(max.)

“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.

*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.

Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:

Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=120"/304.8cm.

Thethrowdistanceis120"/304.8cm×1.5to120"/304.8cm×3.0=180"/457.2cmto360"/914.4cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

165

8. Appendix

Projection range for the different lenses

NP12ZL

NP11FL

NP30ZL

NP14ZL

NP43ZL

NP41ZL

NP40ZL

NP13ZL

40-150"

30-500"

50-500"

30-500" 50-500" 50-500"60-500"

WUXGAType:26"-101"/0.7–2.6m

WXGAType:26"-102"/0.7–2.6m

XGAType:0.6–2.7m(max.160")

WUXGAType:33"-445"/0.8–11.3m

WXGAType:33"-445"/0.8–11.3m

XGAType:31"-430"/0.8–10.9m

WUXGAType:28"-651"/0.7–16.5m

WXGAType:29"-656"/0.7–16.7m

XGAType:27"-630"/0.7–16.0m

WUXGAType:36"-1257"/0.9-31.9m

WXGAType:36"-1264"/0.9–32.1m

XGAType:35"-1215"/0.9-30.9m

WUXGAType:33"-478"/0.8-12.1m

WXGAType:33"-480"/0.8-12.2m

XGAType:31"-461"/0.8-11.7m

WUXGAType:54"-1285"/1.4-32.6m

WXGAType:55"-1289"/1.4-32.8m

XGAType:52"-1237"/1.3-31.4m

WUXGAType:146"-2004"/3.7–50.9m

WXGAType:147"-2015"/3.7–51.2m

XGAType:141"-1937"/3.6–49.2m

WUXGAType:129"-2497"/3.3-63.4m

WXGAType:130"-2507"/3.3-63.7m

XGAType:125"-2407"/3.2-61.1m

Motorizedzoom/Motorizedfocus

Manualzoom/Manualfocus

Manual focus

166

8. Appendix

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

WUXGAType/WXGAType

Screen

height

Screen width

16:10 screen size (di-

agonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

30 25 64.6 16 40.4

40 34 86.2 21 53.8

50 42 107.7 26 67.3

60 51 129.2 32 80.8

80 68 172.3 42 107.7

100 85 215.4 53 134.6

120 102 258.5 64 161.5

150 127 323.1 79 201.9

200 170 430.8 106 269.2

240 204 516.9 127 323.1

300 254 646.2 159 403.9

400 339 861.6 212 538.5

500 424 1077.0 265 673.1

XGAType

Screen

height

Screen width

4:3 screen size (di-

agonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

30 24 61.0 18 45.7

40 32 81.3 24 61.0

50 40 101.6 30 76.2

60 48 121.9 36 91.4

80 64 162.6 48 121.9

100 80 203.2 60 152.4

120 96 243.8 72 182.9

150 120 304.8 90 228.6

160 128 325.1 96 243.8

200 160 406.4 120 304.8

240 192 487.7 144 365.8

300 240 609.6 180 457.2

400 320 812.8 240 609.6

500 400 1016.0 300 762.0

167

8. Appendix

Lens shifting range

Thisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebybuttons.The

lenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.

NOTE:

• UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.

* Refertothelensshifttableonthenextpageforthedrawingnumberofthelensshiftrange.

Desk/front projection

100%V

100%H

10%H 10%H

Width of projected image

Height of projected image

Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthofthepro-

jectedimage).

Ceiling/front projector

100%V

100%H

10%H

Height of projected image

Width of projected image

168

8. Appendix

Lens shift table

Applicable

type

Drawing

number

Lensunit

NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL

WUXGAType

①

50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V

②

10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V

③

20%H 30%H 30%H* 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

④

20%H 30%H 30%H* 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

WXGAType

①

50%V 60%V 60%V 60%V 50%V 50%V 50%V

②

10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V

③

20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

④

20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

XGAType

①

35%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 35%V 35%V 35%V

②

10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V

③

20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

④

20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H

* ForWUXGAType,theshiftrangeinthehorizontaldirectionisupto15%Hwhenusingthelensunit“NP13ZL”toprojectascreen

exceedingModel150.

Ex.:Whenprojectingona150"screen

TheexplanationisforaXGATypeprojector(4:3panel)withaNP12ZLlenstted.

• PleasereplacethescreendimensionsandmaximumshiftvalueinthecalculationsfortheWXGATypeandWUXGA

Typeprojectors(16:10panel)aswell.

Accordingtothetablesofscreensizesanddimensions(→page166),H=120"(304.8cm),V=90"(228.6cm).

Adjustmentrangeintheverticaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedupwards0.5×90"(228.6cm)=45"

(114cm),,downwards0.1×90"(228.6cm)=9"(22cm)(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Foraceiling/front

installation,theaboveguresareinverted.

Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.3×120"(304.8cm)=36"

(91cm),totheright0.3×120"(304.8cm)=36"(91cm).

*Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.

169

8. Appendix

❷ Compatible Input Signal List

HDMI/HDBaseT

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMac

SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMac

XGA 1024 × 768 *

4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMac

HD 1280 × 720 *

16 : 9 60

WXGA

1280 × 768 *

15 : 9 60

1280 × 800 *

16 : 10 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60

SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60

FWXGA

1360 × 768 16 : 9 60

1366 × 768 16 : 9 60

SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60

WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60

WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60

WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60

UXGA 1600 × 1200 *

4 : 3 60

FullHD 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 60

WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *

16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60

WQHD

iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10

60(ReducedBlanking)

3840 × 2160 16 : 9

24/25/30/50/60

4096 × 2160 17 : 9 24/25/30/50/60

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 24/25/30/50/60

HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 48/50/60

HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 *

16 : 9 50/60

SDTV(480p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60

SDTV(576p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

SDTV(480i) 1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60

SDTV(576i) 1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

DisplayPort

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60

SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60

XGA 1024 × 768 *

4 : 3 60

HD 1280 × 720 *

16 : 9 60

WXGA

1280 × 768 *

15 : 9 60

1280 × 800 *

16 : 10 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60

SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60

FWXGA

1360 × 768 16 : 9 60

1366 × 768 16 : 9 60

SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60

WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60

WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60

WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60

UXGA 1600 × 1200 *

4 : 3 60

FullHD 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 60

WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *

16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60

WQHD

iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10

60(ReducedBlanking)

3840 × 2160 16 : 9 24/25/30

4096 × 2160 17 : 9 24/25/30

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 24/25/30/50/60

HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60

SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60

SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

170

8. Appendix

Analog RGB

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMac

SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMac

XGA 1024 × 768 *

4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMac

XGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 75

HD 1280 × 720 *

16 : 9 60

WXGA

1280 × 768 *

15 : 9 60/75/85

1280 × 800 *

16 : 10 60/75/85

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/85

SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85

FWXGA

1360 × 768 16 : 9 60

1366 × 768 16 : 9 60

SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75

WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60/75/85

WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60

UXGA 1600 × 1200 *

4 : 3 60

WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 :

10 60

FillHD 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 60

WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *

16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60

FullHD 1920 × 1080 *

16 : 9 60

MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67

MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75

MAC19" 1024 × 768 *

4 : 3 75

MAC21" 1152 × 870 4 : 3 75

MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

Analog Component

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60

HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 48/50/60

HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60

SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60

SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60

SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

171

8. Appendix

HDMI/HDBaseT 3D

SignalResolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz) 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

16 : 9

23.98/24

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

29.97/30

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

59.94/60

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

1920 × 1080i

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

59.94/60

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

1280 × 720p

23.98/24

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

29.97/30

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

59.94/60

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

DisplayPort 3D

SignalResolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz) 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

16 : 9

23.98/24

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

29.97/30

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

59.94/60

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

1280 × 720p

23.98/24

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

29.97/30

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

59.94/60

FramePacking

SideBySide(Half)

TopAndBottom

*1 NativeresolutiononXGAType

*2 NativeresolutiononWXGAType

*3 NativeresolutiononWUXGAType

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.

• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.

• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequired

dependingonthetypeofcomputer.

172

8. Appendix

❸ Specifications

Model name PA803U/PA723U/PA653U PA853W/PA703W PA903X

Method

Threeprimarycolorliquidcrystalshutterprojectionmethod

Specicationsofmainparts

Liquidcrystal

panel

Size 0.76"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:16:10) 0.79"(withMLA)×3

(aspectratio:4:3)

Pixels

(*1)

2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines) 1,024,000(1280

dots×800lines)

786,432(1024dots

×768lines)

Projection lenses

Refertothespecicationsofoptionlens(→ 174page)

Lightsource PA803U:420W(280WwhenECOmode

ison)

PA723U:400W(280WwhenECOmode

ison)

PA653U:370W(280WwhenECOmode

ison)

PA853W:420W

(280WwhenECO

modeison)

PA703W:370W

(280WwhenECO

modeison)

420W(280Wwhen

ECOmodeison)

Opticaldevice Integrator,DichroicMirror,XDP

Lightoutput

(*2)

(*3)

ECOOFF PA803U:8000lm

PA723U:7200lm

PA653U:6500lm

PA853W:8500lm

PA703W:7000lm

9000lm

Contrastratio

(*2)

(allwhite/allblack) PA803U:10000:1

PA723U/PA653U:8000:1

PA853W:10000:1

PA703W:8000:1

10000:1

Screensize(throwdistance) 30"to500"(throwdistancedependsonlens)

Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)

Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingto

VESAstandards

Digital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards

Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Digital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Main adjustment functions

ZOOM,FOCUS,LENSSHIFT(Refertothespecicationsofoptionlens→ 174

page),inputsignalswitching(HDMI1/HDMI2/DisplayPort/COMPUTER/HDBaseT),

autoimageadjustment,pictureenlarging,picturepositionadjustment,muting(both

videoandaudio),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×

vertical)

AnalogWUXGA(1920×1200)withAdvancedAccuBlendPixelclockfrequency:less

than165MHz

DigitalQuadHD(4096×2160)withAdvancedAccuBlendPixelclockfrequency:less

than600MHz(HDBaseT:300MHz)

Inputsignals

R,G,B,H,V

RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75Ω

H/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTL

CompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTL

SynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Component

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75Ω

DTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)

576i,576p,720p,1080i(50Hz)

DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Audio

0.5Vrms/22kΩorgreater

Input/outputconnectors

Computer/Com-

ponent

Video input MiniD-Sub15-pin×1

Audioinput Stereominijack×1

Audiooutput Stereominijack×1(commonforallsignals)

HDMI Video input HDMI

ConnectortypeA×2

RJ-450×1,100BASE-TXcompatible

DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatible

Colorimetry:RGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,YCbCr420,REC2020,REC709,REC601

SupportsLipSync,HDCP

(*4)

,4KHDRand3D

Audioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

173

8. Appendix

Model name PA803U/PA723U/PA653U PA853W/PA703W PA903X

HDBaseT/Eth-

ernet

Video input

DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bits

Colorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,YCbCr420,REC2020,REC709,

REC601

SupportLipSync,HDCP

(*4)

,4K,3D,HDR

Video output RJ-45x1,100BASE-TX

DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bits

Colorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,REC709,REC601

SupportLipSync,HDCP

(*4)

,4K,3D

Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHz

Samplingbit:16/20/24bit

Audiooutput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHz

Samplingbit:16/20/24bits

DisplayPort Video input DisplayPort×1

Datarate:5.4Gbps/2.7Gbps/1.62Gbps

No.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanes

Colordepth:8bits,10bits,12bits

Colorimetry:RGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,REC709,REC601

HDCPcompatible

(*4)

Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

PCcontrolterminal D-Sub9-pin×1

USBport USBtypeA×1

Ethernet/LAN/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,Supports10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Remoteterminal Stereominijack×1

3DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse

Usageenvironment Operatingtemperature:41to104°F(5to40°C)

(*5)

Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)

Storagetemperature:14to122°F(-10to50°C)

Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)

Operatingaltitude:0to3650m/12000feet

(1700to3650m/5500to12000feet:Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALUTITUDE])

Power supply 100-240VAC,50/60Hz

Power con-

sumption

Ecomode OFF PA803U:566W(100-130VAC)/542W

(200-240VAC)

PA723U:542W(100-130VAC)/518W

(200-240VAC)

PA653U:506W(100-130VAC)/482W

(200-240VAC)

PA853W:566W

(100-130VAC)/542

W(200-240VAC)

PA703W:506W

(100-130VAC)/

482W(200-240V

AC)

566W(100-130V

AC)/542W(200-

240VAC)

ON 390W(100-130VAC)/376W(200-240VAC)

STANDBY Link-up 0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)

Link-down 0.11W(100-130VAC)/0.16W(200-240VAC)

Ratedinputcurrent PA803U:2.6A(100-130V)/6.2A(200-

240V)

PA723U:2.5A(100-130V)/6.0A(200-

240V)

PA653U:2.3A(100-130V)/5.6A(200-

240V)

PA853W:2.6A

(100-130V)/6.2A

(200-240V)

PA703W:2.3A

(100-130V)/5.6A

(200-240V)

2.6A(100-130V)/

6.2A(200-240V)

Externaldimensions(W×H×D) 19.8"(width)×6.6"(height)×16.2"(depth)/503(width)×168(height)×411(depth)

mm(includingprotrudingparts)

19.6"(width)×6.4"(height)×16.0"(depth)/499(width)×164(height)×406(depth)

mm(notincludingprotrudingparts)

Weight 22.5lbs/10.2kg(notincludinglens)

174

8. Appendix

*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.

*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Thelightoutputvalueswilldropto

70%when[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE].Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemay

dropslightly.

*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2012

*4 IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.With

theimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayed

duetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

 Video:HDR,DeepColor,8/10/12-bit,LipSync.

 Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit

 HDMI:SupportsHDCP2.2/1.4

 DisplayPort:SupportsHDCP1.4

 HDBaseT:SupportsHDCP2.2/1.4

*5 95to104°F(35to40°C)–“Forcedecomode”

• Thesespecicationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Optionlens(soldseparately)

NP11FL Throwratio0.81:1,F2.3,f=13.2mm

NP12ZL Throwratio1.16-1.52:1,F2.20-2.69,f=19.4-25.3mm

NP13ZL Throwratio1.46-2.95:1,F1.70-2.37,f=24.4-48.6mm

NP14ZL Throwratio2.90-4.68:1,F2.20-2.64,f=48.5-77.6mm

NP30ZL Throwratio0.79-1.04:1,F1.90-2.10,f=13.2-17.2mm

NP40ZL Throwratio0.79-1.11:1,F2.0-2.5,f=13.3-18.6mm

NP41ZL Throwratio1.30-3.02:1,F1.7-2.0,f=21.8-49.7mm

NP43ZL Throwratio2.99-5.93:1,F2.2-2.6,f=49.7-99.8mm

NOTE:

• Theabovethrowratioisforprojectingon100"screenbyWUXGA.

• ForusingNP30ZL,settheECOmodetoON.

• UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.

175

8. Appendix

90 (3.5)

499 (19.6)

250 (9.8)

200 (7.9)

68 (2.7)

411 (16.2)

164 (6.4)

168 (6.6)

503 (19.8)

406 (16.0)

INPUT

FOCUSSHIFT

EXIT

ZOOM

ENTER

L-CALIB.

HOME

POSITION

❹ Cabinet Dimensions

Lens center

Unit:mm(inch)

176

8. Appendix

❺ Mounting the cable cover (sold separately)

Mountingtheseparatelysoldcablecover(NP10CV)ontheprojectorallowsyouhidethecablesforacleaner

appearance.

CAUTION

• Aftermountingthecablecover,besuretofastenusingthescrewsprovided.Ifnot,thecablecovercouldfall

anddamagethecablecoverandpossiblyresultingininjury.

• Donotbundlethepowercordandplaceitunderthecablecover.Doingsocouldleadtore.

• Donotholdthecablecoverwhilemovingtheprojectoranddonotapplyexcessiveforcetothecablecover.

Doingsocoulddamagethecablecover,resultingintheprojectorfallingorcausinginjury.

Mounting

Preparations:

1. Connect the power cord and cables to the projector (the connection cords are omitted from the diagrams).

2. Prepare a Phillips screwdriver.

1. Insertthetworoundprotrusionsontheleftandrightedges

ofthecablecoverintothegroovesinthebottomofthe

projector to line it up.

NOTE:Becarefulnottoletthepowercordandcablesgetpinchedbythe

cable cover.

2. Turnthecablecoverscrewclockwise.

• Tightenthescrewsecurely.

Removing

1. Turnthecablecoverscrewcounterclockwiseuntilitturns

loosely.

• Hold the cable cover while doing this to prevent it from

falling.

• Thescrewdoesnotcomecompletelyoff.

2. Removethecablecover.

• Turnthecablecoveralittle,thenliftitoff.

177

8. Appendix

❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main connectors

COMPUTER IN/ Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)

Connection and signal level of each pin

51423

11 12 13 14 15

6978

Signal Level

Videosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)

Syncsignal:TTLlevel

Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCr Signal

1 Red Cr

GreenorSynconGreen Y

3 Blue Cb

4 Ground

5 Ground

RedGround CrGround

7 GreenGround YGround

8 BlueGround CbGround

9 NoConnection

10 SyncSignalGround

11 NoConnection

12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)

13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync

14 VerticalSync

15 DataClock

HDMI 1 IN/HDMI 2 IN Connector (Type A)

135791113151719

246810 12 14 16 18

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield

2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−

3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC

TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection

TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL

TMDSData1− 16 SDA

TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding

8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply

9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection

10 TMDSClock+

DisplayPort IN Connector

135791113151719

246810 12 14 16 18 20

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding0

2 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+

3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Conguration1

4 Mainlinklane2− 14 Conguration2

5 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+

6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding4

7 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−

8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection

9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return

Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply

178

8. Appendix

HDBaseT IN/Ethernet Port (RJ-45)

12345678

Pin No. Signal

1 TxD+/HDBT0+

2 TxD−/HDBT0−

3 RxD+/HDBT1+

4 Disconnection/HDBT2+

5 Disconnection/HDBT2−

6 RxD−/HDBT1−

7 Disconnection/HDBT3+

8 Disconnection/HDBT3−

USB-A Port (Type A)

Pin No. Signal

1 V

BUS

2 D−

3 D+

4 Grounding

PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)

1234

6789

Pin No. Signal

1 Unused

RxD receptiondata

3 TxD transmissiondata

4 Unused

5 Grounding

6 Unused

RTS transmissionrequest

8 CTS transmissionallowed

9 Unused

179

8. Appendix

❼ Changing the Background Logo (Virtual Remote Tool)

Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.

Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,

youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control Functions

PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremote

controloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

Use this button for changing

the background logo.

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ForgettingtheVirtualRemoteTool,pleasevisitourwebsiteanddownloadit:

http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

NOTE:

• RemoteControlWindowisnotavailableforchangingthebackgroundlogo.

 PleaseseetheHELPmenuoftheVirtualRemoteToolabouthowtodisplaytheToolbar.

• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions:

 (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)

* Filesize:Within256kilobytes

* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector

* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)

• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.

• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagele

(NP-PA803U/NP-PA723U/NP-PA653U:¥Logo¥necpj_bbwux.png,NP-PA853W/NP-PA703W:¥Logo¥necpj_bbwx.png,NP-PA903X:

¥Logo¥necpj_bb_x.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

180

8. Appendix

❽ Troubleshooting

Thissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Feature of each indicator

②③④①

① POWERindicator

 Thisindicatorinformsthepowerstatusoftheprojector.

② STATUSindicator

 Thisindicatorlights/blinkswhenabuttonispressedwhiletheCONTROL

PANELLOCKfunctionisutilized,orwhileperformingthelenscalibration

andspecicoperations.

③ LAMPindicator

 Thisindicatorinformsthestateoflamp,usagetimeofthelamp,andthe

statusofECOMODE.

④ TEMP.indicator

 Thisisthetemperatureindicatorinformingtemperaturetroublewhenthe

ambienttemperatureistoohigh/low.

Indicator Message (Status message)

POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status

Power is off

Off Off Off Off

InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisready.

Orange

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisunavail-

able.

Orange

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisavail-

able)

Orange

(Light)

Off Off Off

ONtimeastheprogramtimerisactivated.(InthestateofStandby)

Orange

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

InthestateofSleep

Green

(Light)

Off Off Off

ONtimeastheprogramtimerisactivated.(InthestateofSleep)

Green

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

Poweredstate(ECOmodeisOFF)

Blue

(Light)

Off Green

(Light)

Off

181

8. Appendix

POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status

Poweredstate(ECOmodeisON)

Blue

(Light)

Off Green

(Blink*

)

Off

Lenscalibrationimplementrequest.

Status

varies

Orange

(Blink*

)

Status

varies

Off

Performingthelenscalibration

Blue

(Light)

Green

(Blink*

)

Status

varies

Off

OFFTimerisactivated,OFFtimeastheproogramtimerisactivated(Powered

state)

Blue

(Blink*

)

Off Status

varies

Off

PreparingforpoweringON

Blue

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

*1 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor1.5seconds

*2 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor7.5seconds

*3 Repetitiontolightonfor2.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds

*4 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds/onfor0.5seconds/offfor2.5seconds

*5 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds

182

8. Appendix

Indicator Message (Error message)

POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status Procedure

Abuttonhasbeenpressedwhilethe

KEYLOCKisactivated.

The projector's keys are locked. The

settingmustbecanceledtooperatethe

projector. (→page122)

Blue

(Light)

Orange

(Light)

Status

varies

Off

IDnumbersfortheprojectorandthe

remote control do not match.

CheckthecontrolIDs(→page123)

Lampreplacementgraceperiod. Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsser-

vice life and is now in the replacement

graceperiod(100hours).Replacethe

lamp to new one as soon as possible.

(→page156)

Status

varies

Off Orange

(Blink*

)

Off

Lampreplacementtimeexceeded. Thelamphasexceededitsreplacement

time.Replacethelampimmediately.

Status

varies

Off Red

(Blink*

)

Off

Preparingtorelightlampafterlighting

has failed.

Waitawhile.

Blue

(Blink*

)

Off Green

(Blink*

)

Off

Temperatureproblem(IntheForced

ECO)

Ambienttemtepratureishigh.Lowerthe

room temperature.

Blue

(Light)

Off Orange

(Light)

Orange

(Light)

Temperatureproblem Ambient temperature is out of the

operation temperature. Check if any

obstructionstaysneartheexhaustvent.

Red

(Blink*

)

Off Off Off

Lampdoesnotlight. Waitatleast1minute,themturnonthe

power back on. if the lamp still does

notlight,contactyourdelaerorservice

personnel.

Red

(Blink*

)

Green

(Light)

Red

(Light)

Off

Lampcoverproblem Lamp cover is not mounted properly.

Mount it properly. (→seepage158).

Red

(Blink*

)

Red

(Light)

Green

(Light)

Off

Lensproblem Thelensisnotmountedproperly,orthe

non-supportedlensismounted.Make

sure that the lens is supported, and

mount it correctly. (→seepage141).

Red

(Blink*

)

Red

(Light)

Red

(Light)

Off

Errorrequiringservicesupport Contactyourdealerorserviceperson-

nel. Make sure to check and inform

indicatorstatusforaskingtorepair.

Red

(Light)

Status

varies

Status

varies

Off

*1 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor1.5seconds

*2 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor7.5seconds

*3 Repetitiontolightonfor2.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds

*4 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds/onfor0.5seconds/offfor2.5seconds

*5 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds

• Whenthethermalprotectorisactivated:

 Wheninsidetemperatureoftheprojectorbecomestoohighorlow,thePOWERindicatorstarttoredblinkina

shortcycle.Afterthishappened,thethermalprotectorwillactivateandtheprojectormaybeturnedoff.

 Inthiscase,pleasetakethebelowmeasures:

- Pulloutthepowerplugfromthewallinlet.

- Placetheprojectorincoolplaceifithasbeenplacedinhighambienttemperature.

- Cleantheexhaustventifdusthasaccumulatedon.

- Leavetheprojectorforaboutonehouruntilinsidetemperaturegetslower.

183

8. Appendix

Explanation on the POWER indicator and standby state

In the state the selected PROFILE for WIRED LAN is available.

Available ports in each state

(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)

HDBaseT IN/

Ethernet

HDBaseT

OUT/Ethernet

LAN PC CONTROL

○ ○ ○

× ○ ○

Indicator : Lights in blue

PoweredONstate

Indicator : Lights in green

Sleepstate

Indicator : Blinks in orange

Standbystate:Waitingtolinkwiththe

network

Indicator : Lights in orange

Standbystate:Thenetworkislinked.

Link-upnetwork

Link-down network for ap-

prox.10seconds

Power

consumption

High

Low

PowerOn

Inputsignal

Nooperation/Link-down

network/Nosignalinput

forapprox.10seconds

• Inputsignal

• Operationontheweb

browserviatheHTTP

server (→Seepage49)

Nooperation/Nocommunicationwith

thelink-upnetwork/Nosignalinputfor

approx.180seconds

PowerOff

PowerOn

184

8. Appendix

In the state the selected PROFILE for WIRED LAN is

unavailable.

Available ports in each state

(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)

HDBaseT IN/Ethernet

HDBaseT OUT/

Ethernet

LAN PC CONTROL

○ × ○

× × ○

Indicator : Lights in blue

PoweredONstate

Indicator : Lights in green

Sleepstate

Indicator:Blinksinorange(withlonginterval)

Standbystate:Thenetworkisunavailable.

Power

consumption

High

Low

PowerOn

Inputsignal

Nooperation/Nosignal

inputforapprox.10

seconds

PowerOff

PowerOn

185

8. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions

(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage180.)

Problem Check These Items

Does not turn on

or shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol

is on� (→ pages 15, 17)

• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 158)

• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhastemperatureerror,Ifprojectorinsidetemperatureistoohotorcool,itdisabledto

turn on the projector as the protection� Wait for a moment and try turn on the projector again�

• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.

• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700meters

or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH

ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple

minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 115)

If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for

some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�

Will turn off

• Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 119, 133)

No picture

• Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 19) If there is still no picture, press the INPUT button or one of

the input buttons again�

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.

• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 90)

• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 17)

• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 134)

• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 43)

• IftheHDMIinputortheDisplayPortsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.

- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver�

For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or graphics

card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer�

Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility�

We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�

• ThesignalmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.Inaddition,RS232Cinterface

may not be supported�

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthe

power to the notebook PC�

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before

being powered up�

* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver or

power management software�

• Seealsothepage187�

Picture suddenly

becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase,lower

the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]� (→ page 115)

Color tone or hue is

unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 115)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 91)

Image isn’t square to

the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)

• Perform[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]whenthetrapezoidisdistorted.(→ page 103)

Picture is blurred

• Adjustthefocus.(→ page 23)

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)

• Ensure that thedistance between theprojector and screenis within theadjustment range ofthe lens.

(→ page 162)

• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 167)

• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturnedon.Should

this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�

Flicker appears on

screen

• Set[FANMODE]tootherthan[HIGHALTITUDE]modewhenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500

feet/1700 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting

to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to ﬂicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]�

(→ page 115)

Image is scrolling

vertically, horizontally

or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported

by the projector� (→ page 169)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 92)

Remote control does

not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 12)

• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.

• Standwithin40m/1575inchoftheprojector.(→ page 13)

Indicator is lit or

blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 180)

186

8. Appendix

Problem Check These Items

Cross color in RGB

mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 30)

• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page 92)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

187

8. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

 BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon

thepowertothenotebookPC.

 InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbefore

beingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,

this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 137 or go to next step)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

 DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.

WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-

ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon

oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough

externaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

 IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayed

correctly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.Each

notebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.

Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac

 WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-

cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.

 ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchon

aMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchto

the13"xedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthen

restarttheMacagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub

15-pin connector.

• MirroringonaMacBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyour

MacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen

 Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApple

menuandarrangeicons.

188

8. Appendix

❾ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection

PC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT HDMI1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H

INPUT SELECT HDMI2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A2H AAH

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H BFH C7H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H

SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable Connection

CommunicationProtocol

Baud rate ��115200/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps

Data length

��8 bits

Parity

��No parity

Stop bit

��1 bit

X on/off

��None

Communications procedure

��Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Port (D-SUB 9P)

NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

15243

67 98

To GND of PC

To RxD of PC

To TxD of PC

To RTS of PC

To CTS of PC

189

8. Appendix

ABOUT THE ASCII CONTROL COMMAND

ThisdevicesupportsthecommonASCIIControlCommandforcontrollingourprojectorandmonitor.

Please visit our web site for detailed information about the command.

http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html

HOWTOCONNECTWITHANEXTERNALDEVICE

Therearetwomethodstoconnecttheprojectorwithanexternaldevicesuchasacomputer.

① Connectionthrutheserialport.

 Connectstheprojectortoacomputerbyaserialcable(acrosscable).

② Connectionvianetwork(LAN/HDBaseT)

 ConnectstheprojectortoacomputerbyaLANcable.

 ConcerningtothetypeofLANcable,pleaseasktoyournetworkadministrator.

CONNECTION INTERFACE

① Connectionthrutheserialport.

 CommunicationProtocol

Item Information

Baudrate 115200/38400/19200/9600/4800bps

Datalength 8bits

Parity bit Noparity

Stopbit 1bit

Flowcontrol None

Communicationsprocedure Fullduplex

② Connectionvianetwork

 CommunicationProtocol(ConnectionviaLAN)

Item Information

Communicationspeed Setautomatically(10/100Mbps)

Supportedstandard IEEE802.3(10BASE-T)

IEEE802.3u(100BASE-TX,Auto-Negotiation)

 UsetheTCPportnumber7142fortransmittingandreceivingcommand.

 CommunicationProtocol(ConnectionviaHDBaseT)

Item Information

Communicationspeed 100Mbps

Supportedstandard IEEE802.3u(100BASE-TX,Auto-Negotiation)

 UsetheTCPportnumber7142fortransmittingandreceivingcommand.

PARAMETERSFORTHISDEVICE

Input command

Inputterminal Response Parameter

HDMI1 hdmi1

hdmi1orhdmi

HDMI2 hdmi2 hdmi2

DisplayPort displayport

displayportordisplayport1

COMPUTER computer Oneamongcomputer,computer1,vga,vga1,rgb,andrgb1

HDBaseT hdbaset hdbasetorhdbaset1

190

8. Appendix

Status command

Response ErrorStatus

error:cover Lampcovertrouble

error:temp Temperatureerror

error:fan Fantrouble

error:light Lightsourcetrouble

error:system Systemtrouble

warning:light Underthegraceperiodoflampreplacement

warning:lter Filterreplacement

191

8. Appendix

❿ Troubleshooting Check List

Beforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsoby

referringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblem

more efficiently.

* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □other(__________________)

Power

□

No power (POWER indicator does not light blue)� See also “Status

Indicator (STATUS)”�

□

Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�

□

Lamp cover is installed correctly�

□

Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after

lamp replacement�

□

No power even though you press and hold the POWER button�

□

Shut down during operation�

□

Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�

□

Lamp cover is installed correctly�

□

[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO

POWER OFF] function)�

□

[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]

function)�

Video and Audio

□

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the

projector�

□

Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC

ﬁrst, then start the PC�

□

Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�

• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-

naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalong

with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display

on or off.

□

No image (blue or black background, no display)�

□

Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�

□

Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�

□

Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector

□

A message appears on the screen�

(_____________________________________________)

□

The source connected to the projector is active and available�

□

Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or

the contrast�

□

Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector�

□

Image is too dark�

□

Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness

and/or the contrast�

□

Image is distorted�

□

Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you

carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�

□

Parts of the image are lost�

□

Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button�

□

Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�

□

Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�

□

Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a

computer signal�

□

Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector�

□

Some pixels are lost�

□

Image is ﬂickering�

□

Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button�

□

Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�

□

Image shows ﬂickering or color drift on a computer signal�

□

Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from

[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�

□

Image appears blurry or out of focus�

□

Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution

on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�

□

Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�

□

No sound�

□

Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the

projector�

□

Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level�

□

AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models

with the AUDIO OUT connector)�

Other

□

Remote control does not work�

□

No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the

remote control�

□

Projector is placed near a ﬂuorescent light that can disturb the

infrared remote controls�

□

Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�

□

Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the

[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)

□

[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in

the menu�

□

Still unchanged even though you press and hold the INPUT

button for a minimum of 10 seconds�

192

8. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector

Blu-ray player

Projector

Model number:

Serial No�:

Date of purchase:

Lamp operating time (hours):

Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ON

Information on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz

Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz

Synch polarity H □ (+) □ (−)

V □ (+) □ (−)

Synch type □ Separate □ Composite

□ Sync on Green

Indicator Message:

□ POWER

Blinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

[ ] cycles

Lights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

□ STATUS

Blinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

[ ] cycles

Lights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

□ LAMP

Blinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

[ ] cycles

Lights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red

Remote control model number:

Installation environment

Screen size: inch

Screen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization

□ Wide angle □ High contrast

Throw distance: feet/inch/m

Orientation: □ Ceiling mount □ Desktop

Power outlet connection:

□

Connected directly to wall outlet

□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the

numberofconnectedequipment______________)

□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

ofconnectedequipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC □ / Desktop □

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Signal cable

NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?

Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution ampliﬁer

Model number:

Switcher

Model number:

Adapter

Model number:

193

8. Appendix

⓫ REGISTER YOUR PROJECTOR! (for residents in the United

States, Canada, and Mexico)

Pleasetaketimetoregisteryournewprojector.ThiswillactivateyourlimitedpartsandlaborwarrantyandInstaCare

serviceprogram.

Visit our web site at www.necdisplay.com,clickonsupportcenter/registerproductandsubmityourcompletedform

online.

Uponreceipt,wewillsendaconrmationletterwithallthedetailsyouwillneedtotakeadvantageoffast,reliable

warrantyandserviceprogramsfromtheindustryleader,NECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.

NEC NP-PA803U-41ZL 8,000-Lumen Professional Installation Projector with lens & 4K support

Product's Documents

User’s Manual

Specifications

NEC NP-PA803U-41ZL Questions and Answers